JP2020081549A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To improve an amusement in a game in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: game control means capable of executing a variable display game; performance control means capable of executing a performance related to the variable display game. When a stop result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the game machine can generate a special game state advantageous to a player. The performance control means can execute a pseudo continuous performance in which a pseudo variable performance for suggesting an expectation degree at which a stop result of the variable display game becomes the special result, is performed by a prescribed number in one variable display game. In at least twice pseudo variable performance out of the pseudo variable performance which is performed by the prescribed number, a performance which has a same content to the pseudo variable performance which is executed formerly, is executed also on the pseudo variable performance which is executed later in a state in which a mode for suggesting the expectation degree of becoming the special result is different from each other.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 36

Description

The present invention comprises a game control means capable of executing a variable display game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the variable display game, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result. , A gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to a player.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are game machines capable of displaying a plurality of effects in display devices used for effects (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2010-069113, A

However, in the conventional gaming machine, only a few of the various effects that the player can easily pay attention to are limited, which may reduce the interest of the game.

An object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a game in a game machine.

In a typical form of the present invention, a game control means capable of executing a variable display game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the variable display game are provided, and a stop result of the variable display game is In a gaming machine capable of generating a special game state that is advantageous to the player when a special result is obtained, the effect control means sets the stop result of the variable display game to the special result in one variation display game. It is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect in which a pseudo variation effect that suggests the expected degree is performed a predetermined number of times, and the expectation degree that is the special result is suggested in at least two pseudo variation effects that are performed the predetermined number of times. The effect of the same content as the pseudo variation effect that is executed first after changing the mode to be performed is also executed in the pseudo variation effect that is executed later.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of a game in a gaming machine.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is the block diagram which shows the constitution example of the production control system of the game machine. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of probability setting change / confirmation processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special process starting port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 1 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit flag 2 setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the big hit judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of fluctuation pattern setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of the universal figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a normal figure normal process. It is the flowchart which shows the main processing of the production control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows received command check processing. It is a flow chart which shows received command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows single-shot system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows symbol system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing. It is the table figure which illustrates the expectation which becomes the big hit for the execution form of each announcement production. It is a figure explaining a specific example of the discernment mode of the 1st notice production, and is a figure showing an example of a display screen of a display. It is a figure explaining the example of the discernment mode of the 2nd notice production, and is a figure showing an example of the display screen of a display. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the 1) of a screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is an example (the 2) of a screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is another example (the 1) of the screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is the screen transition diagram which showed the display screen of a display device in time series, and is another example (the 2) of the screen transition when a notice production is performed during a variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device in time series, and is a modification of the screen transition when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game. It is a modification of the table diagram which illustrates the points related to the expectation degree of the big hit for the execution mode of each notice effect. It is a timing chart when a notice effect is applied to the pseudo continuous effect. It is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device according to the second embodiment executes a suggested effect. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screens of the display device according to the second embodiment in time series, and is an example (part 1) of screen transitions when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. It is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device according to the second embodiment in time series, and is an example (part 2) of the screen transition when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. It is the 1st modification and the 2nd modification of a timing chart when the production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is the 3rd modification of a timing chart when a production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is the 4th modification of a timing chart when a production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is the 5th modification of a timing chart when a production control device concerning a 2nd embodiment performs suggestive production. It is an example of a timing chart when executing the effect control device suggestive effect according to the comparative example. It is a front view of the game board of the game machine of the third embodiment. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is the figure which expanded the part enclosed with the dashed-dotted line in FIG. It is a top view (AA line sectional view of FIG. 44) of a rotary body unit, It is a figure (the 1) which shows the state of the game ball in the rotary body unit 800. It is a top view (AA line sectional view of FIG. 44) of a rotary body unit, It is a figure (the 2) which shows the state of the game ball in the rotary body unit 800. It is a top view (AA line sectional view of FIG. 44) of a rotary body unit, and is a figure (the 3) which shows the state of the game ball in a rotary body unit. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing of a 3rd embodiment. It is a top view (AA sectional view taken on the line of Drawing 44) of a rotary body unit which constitutes the 1st modification of the game machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a top view (AA line sectional view of Drawing 44) of a rotary body unit which constitutes the 2nd modification of the game machine of a 3rd embodiment. It is a perspective view of the 3rd modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the distribution device which comprises the 3rd modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the 4th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 1st distribution unit which comprises the 4th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the 2nd distribution unit which comprises the 5th modification of the game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the operation|movement of the distribution of the game ball by a 2nd distribution unit. It is the graph which compared the probability density distribution of the start value of the game machine of 3rd execution form and the probability density distribution of the start value of the former game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system concerning a 4th embodiment. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit of the periphery of a game microcomputer and each driver IC chip. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit around the game microcomputer and the IC chip for solenoid drivers. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit of the periphery of a game microcomputer and a connector part. It is a figure explaining the example 1 of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the example 2 of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining the example 3 of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on the board (main board) of a game control device. It is a figure explaining an example of wiring (modification) when a chip select line is omitted about an example of wiring between a connector part and a buffer or a game microcomputer on a board (main board) of a game control device. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates the electric circuit (electronic circuit) of the periphery of a connector part and a serial-parallel conversion circuit on a relay substrate.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. The front, rear, left and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed by the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machines]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a game machine.

The gaming machine 10 is provided with an opening/closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable/closable via a hinge. The open/close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is arranged on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that allows the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 to be visually recognized.

The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be individually opened. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not open, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 3) and the like arranged on the back surface side of the game board 30. You can

Various frame components are arranged on the edge of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

At the center and the left side of the upper portion of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house illumination members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light-emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members arranged inside the decoration devices 18a and 18b form a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

Upper speakers 19a are arranged at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. In addition to these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided in the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19b is arranged in the lower left corner of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit a sound effect, an alarm sound, a notification sound, and the like.

On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 is provided which extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects forward (toward the player). The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs light emission effect and the like according to the progress state of the game. The lighting member arranged inside the projection effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launching device (not shown) one by one.

The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that accepts an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. ..

The effect operation device is an operation device in which a touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the center of the upper part of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate it.

When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened in a special figure variation display game (game) displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode) or execute a notice effect that gives advance notice of the result of the variable display game (game) corresponding to the starting memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when it is simply referred to as a variable display game, this specification refers to the special figure variable display game.

Further, the production pattern may be changed not only during execution of the variable display game but also during operation of the production operation device by the player.

The game state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of game states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. Further, the special gaming state is, for example, a time saving state as a specific gaming state or a state in which a high probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) in a variable display game (probable change state, probability changing state), big hit state (special game state). ).

Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit occurs (loop type), one that continues until a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (number cut type, ST), and There are those that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

Furthermore, without determining whether or not to generate a probability variation state by a big hit symbol random number, a probability variation state may always be generated when a big hit occurs, or a winning device or the like having a specific area is provided to specify. The probability change state may be generated when the game ball passes through the area.

The ball lending operation device is an operation device operated by a player when borrowing a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when renting a game ball, and the return button 28 is for ejecting a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

The decoration device 22 accommodates a lighting member such as an LED inside, and is a device for performing a light emission effect or the like according to a game state, and is provided in a front portion of the upper plate unit. The lighting member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4 ).

Below the glass frame 15 including the above-mentioned upper plate unit and the like, below the front frame 12, an operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launching device (not shown) and a game ball can be stored. The lower plate 23 is provided.

The operation handle 24 is disposed on the lower right side of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player turns the operation handle 24, the ball launching device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The launch speed of the game ball launched from the ball launch device is set to increase as the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 24 increases. That is, the ball launching device can change the launching force, which is the force (speed) of launching the game ball into the game area, in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game can be performed in various launching modes with different launching forces. You can fire a ball. The launch mode includes left striking (normal striking) that causes the game ball to flow down on the left side of the game area 32, and right striking that causes the game ball to flow down on the right side of the game area 32.

The lower plate 23 is arranged below the upper plate unit with a predetermined distance from the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removal hole 23a that vertically penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23, and an opening/closing operation portion 23b for opening and closing the ball removal hole 23a. When the player operates the opening/closing operation portion 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, the game balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Game board]
Subsequently, the game board 30 of the game machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the game machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat board-shaped game board body 30a that serves as a mounting base for various members. The game board body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to shoot a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 to play a game. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails and the like are arranged as members for converting the flow direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members.

A center case (front structure) 40 that forms a window that serves as a display area of the variable display game is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of pieces of identification information is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that the display content can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may be one having a display such as an EL or CRT.

The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and in each variable display area, identification information (special symbols) and a character that produces a variable display game are displayed. In addition, images based on the progress of the game (big hit display, fanfare display, ending display, etc.) are displayed on the display screen.

Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage where the game ball passing through the warp passage 40e can roll. Section 40b is provided. Since the stage part 40b of the center case 40 is arranged above the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37, the game ball rolled on the stage 40b is moved to the starting winning port 36 or the ordinary variation winning device 37. It is easy to win the prize.

An upper effect unit 40c and a side effect unit 40d are provided on the upper and right sides of the center case 40, respectively. The upper effect unit 40c and the side effect unit 40d constitute a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 4) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 4).

In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 is provided. Inside the universal figure starting gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit in the game area 32 passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, the universal figure variation display game is executed.

The general winning opening 35 is arranged in the lower left gaming area 32 of the center case 40, and the general winning opening 35 is also arranged in the lower right playing area 32 of the center case 40. The winning of the game ball into these general winning openings 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 3) provided in the general winning openings 35.

In the game area 32 below the center case 40, there is provided a starting winning opening (first starting winning area) 36 for giving a starting condition of the special figure variation display game, and a second starting winning opening (second A normal variable winning device 37 having a starting winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member (movable piece) 37b that is rotated in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side to convert the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows. When the movable member 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot normally win the variable winning device 37. When the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37, the special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game.

The movable member 37b is a so-called toro-type ordinary electric accessory, and is rotated via the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) when the result of the general variable display game is a predetermined stop display mode. The game ball is opened to change to the open state (the winning easy state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37.

The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 shortens the variation time of the universal figure variation display game or increases the hit probability of the universal figure variation display game to be higher than usual, thereby increasing the frequency of occurrence of the easy prize winning state and the normal gaming state. By increasing the generation time of the prize winning easy state than the prize winning easy state, the time saving state (universal power support state) is generated as the specific game state. In the probability variation state (excluding the latent probability variation state), a time saving state (universal power support state) occurs in an overlapping manner.

In the game area 32 on the lower right side of the normal variation winning device 37, an attacker-type opening/closing door that opens the special winning opening by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the front side by the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) The special variation winning device 39 having 39c is provided. The special variation winning device 39 converts the state in which the special winning opening is closed (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variation display game, and wins a big prize. By facilitating the inflow of the game ball into the mouth, a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. In addition, inside the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (special winning opening switch 39a, see FIG. 3) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. Further, a light emitting member that illuminates the special winning opening is arranged in or near the special winning opening.

A specific area 86 (so-called V winning opening) is provided inside the second special variation winning device 39. When a game ball enters the specific area 86 (V winning opening), the probability change state (high probability state, specific game state) after the jackpot is determined. The specific area 86 may be opened for a long time so that the game ball can easily pass only in the case of the probability variation big hit. In addition, the game control device 100 can detect passage of a game ball to the specific area 86 (V winning) through a sensor (specific area switch 72 described later) or the like. When a V winning is detected, the gaming control apparatus 100 shifts to a sudden change state after the big hit ends. In addition to confirming that it is done, information (a specific area passing command or the like) indicating that there is a V winning is transmitted to the effect control device 300 described later. Then, the effect control device 300 can notify the V winning on the display device 41 or the like.

When a game ball wins the major winning opening of the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning device 39, the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 3) indicates the type of the winning opening. The prize balls of the number corresponding to are discharged from the dispensing device to the upper plate 21. Further, in the game area 32 below the normal variation winning device 37, an outlet 30b for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.

Further, a special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game, special figure 2 variation display game) and a general figure variation display game are executed on the lower right corner of the game board body 30a outside the game area 32. A collective display device 50 is provided. The collective display device 50 includes display units 51 to 60 that display information such as the current game state.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display section 51 (special figure 1 display, lamp D1) and a second special figure fluctuation for a variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. Display unit 52 (special figure 2 display, lamp D2), variation display section 53 (general figure display, lamps D10, D18) for the general figure variation display game, and the number of starting (holding) memories for each variation display game And a storage display unit for notification (special figure 1 hold indicator 54, special figure 2 hold indicator 55, general figure hold indicator 56). The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 is composed of lamps D11 and D12. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 is composed of lamps D13 and D14. The universal figure hold indicator 56 is composed of lamps D15 and D16.

Further, the collective display device 50 is provided with a first game state display section 57 (first game state indicator, lamp) for informing that the player is right-handed (when right-handed) or left-handed (normal). D8), a second gaming state display unit 58 (second gaming state indicator, lamp D9) that lights up when a time-saving state occurs and notifies that the time-saving state has occurred, and the probability state of a big hit when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on is high. The third game state display section 59 (third game state display unit, probability state display section, lamp D17) that indicates that the state has been displayed, the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing the special variation winning device 39) is displayed. A round display unit 60 (lamps D3 to D7) is provided.

In the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52, the variable display game is executed by a variable display in which identification information (for example, a central segment) is repeatedly turned on and off (blinking). The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are not limited to such a segment type display section, and may be composed of an aggregate of a plurality of LEDs, or when performing variable display. In addition, all the LEDs provided as indicators are all turned on and off (all LEDs are simultaneously blinked), cyclically turned on (one of the LEDs is turned on and off in a predetermined order at a predetermined time interval), or plural It may be performed by turning on/off (blinking) or circulating lighting by a predetermined number of the LEDs. Also on the universal figure display 53, the variable display game is executed by a variable display (blinking) in which the lamps D10 and D18 are repeatedly turned on and off. Further, the universal figure display 53 can also be appropriately configured similarly to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

Further, the lamp display device 80 provided on the upper part of the center case 40 includes a lamp display unit (LED) for performing variable display (blinking) that repeats lighting display and extinguishing display as symbols (fourth special symbol), and each special symbol. It has a lamp display unit (LED) for informing the number of starting (holding) memory of the variable display game. The lamp display device 80 is controlled by the effect control device 300 (described later). The lamp display unit (LED) for notifying the number of starting (holding) memories of each special figure variation display game ends the display of the number of holdings when a big hit occurs. (Including the case where is occurring), the number of reservations is displayed.

Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, details of the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game will be described.

In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the universal figure starting gate 34, the general winning opening 35, and the starting winning opening. 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39 is won, or flows into the outlet 30b provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variation winning device 39, the number of prize balls according to the type of the winning opening is paid out through the payout device. It is discharged to the upper plate 21.

The universal figure starting gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the universal figure starting gate 34. When the game ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the universal figure variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for collision determination extracted at this time.

The state in which the general figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, when the general figure fluctuation display game has already been played and the general figure fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is a win When the gaming ball passes through the universal figure starting gate 34 when the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, if the universal figure starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, the memory number is added (+1).

In the universal figure starting memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit/miss of the universal figure variation display game is stored. When the random number value for hit determination matches the determination value, the universal figure variation display is displayed. The game wins and a specific result mode (specific result) is derived.

The general figure fluctuation display game is executed by the general figure display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The ordinary figure display 53 is composed of LEDs that indicate a hit when the normal identification information (universal figure) is in a lighted state and a deviation when the light is in a non-illuminated state. By flickering the LED, the ordinary identification information fluctuates. The result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined variable display time has elapsed.

When the random number value of the universal figure extracted when passing through the universal figure starting gate 34 is the hit value, the ordinary symbol displayed on the universal figure display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, by driving the universal solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3), the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is changed. Winnings are allowed.

The winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning of the normal variation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3) and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the special display 1 variable display game, and is stored up to a predetermined upper limit, and the game ball that has won the normal variable prize device 37 has the special map 2. It is detected as a start winning ball of the variable display game and is stored within a predetermined upper limit.

At the time of detecting the start winning ball of the special figure fluctuation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random value, each fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of RAM) of the game control device 100 as a special figure starting prize winning storage, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). The memory number of the special figure start winning prize memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 for notifying the start prize number of the collective display device 50, and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning in the starting winning opening 36 or the first starting memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game on the special figure 2 display device 52 based on the winning of the normal variable prize device 37 or the second starting memory.

In the special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure variable display game) and the special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure variable display game), identification information ( This is performed by displaying the predetermined result mode in a stopped state after the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol). In the display device 41, a decorative special figure variable display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special figure variable display game is executed.

In the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, and the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. Further, on the display device 41, various effect displays such as appearance of characters are performed in order to improve the interest. Further, in the decorative special map variation display game, as another decorative special pattern (identification information), in the lamp display section (LED) of the lamp display device 80, the fourth special symbol (by blinking) is repeatedly displayed (flashing). (4th pattern) fluctuates. After a predetermined time from the start, the variable display of the lamp display unit is stopped at "lighting" in the case of being off and "lighting out" in the case of big hit.

On the contrary, the variable display of the lamp display unit (LED) as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) can be stopped by "turning off" when it is out and "lighting" when it is a big hit. .. Also, a configuration in which a plurality of LEDs (fourth pattern LEDs) are provided as each lamp display unit, one of the plurality of LEDs is turned on in the case of a failure, and a plurality of all LEDs are turned on in the case of a big hit It is possible.

When the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value), the special map 1 display device 51 or In the display unit 52 of FIG. 2, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived by the display symbol as a result of the special figure variation display game, and the jackpot state (special game state) is set. Correspondingly, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are aligned).

At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 is wide open for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls are won, and during this period, the player is given the privilege of being able to obtain many game balls. It

Note that the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52 may be configured as separate display devices or the same display device, but each special figure variation display game is not executed at the same time. Is set as follows.

Regarding the decorative special figure variable display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game may be executed on different display devices or different display areas, or the same display may be performed. It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the decorative special figure variable display games corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. The special figure 2 variable display game is designed to be executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game, and there is a starting memory for the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. When the figure variable display game can be executed, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the count switch 39a. Is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter, referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a coil for magnetic detection and uses a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil to detect a game ball. .. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 is a machine Microswitches with specific contacts can be used.

[Game control device]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of a game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100 (main board), and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer). CPU section 110 having an input port 111, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU section 110, the input section 120 and the output section 130. And so on.

The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference clock for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillating circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC32V, DC12V, or DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to be operable. To be done.

The power supply device 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of a lower level such as DC 12V and DC 5V from a voltage of 32V DC. , A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal for informing the game control device 100 of the occurrence or recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply part 420 and the control signal generation part 430 are on separate substrates or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, the main. It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, the cost can be reduced by removing it from the replacement target.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is pushed down and turned on, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forced. The process of initializing to is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

In addition, the game control device 100 (main board) includes a setting key switch 93. The setting key switch 93 is turned on by a rotation operation of the operator or the like to make it possible to change the probability setting value (setting value) according to the setting relating to the game condition (game). The RAM initialization switch 112 can also be used as a setting value changing switch that can change the probability setting value according to the operation of the operator. In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is a setting value for setting a winning probability such as a big hit probability or a small hit probability (only when there is a small hit), but other game conditions (production etc.) other than the probability. Can be changed according to the probability setting value. The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 constitute setting changing means (setting changing device 42) capable of changing the setting (probability setting value) relating to the game condition. It should be noted that instead of the RAM initialization switch 112, another switch may also serve as the set value change switch, or a dedicated set value change switch may be provided exclusively.

The setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are provided on the game control device 100 inside the gaming machine 10, so that the front frame 12 (main body frame) cannot be operated unless the front frame 12 (main body frame) is opened. To be done. That is, a general player cannot access and operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112.

As will be described later, when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on (power failure restoration, power restoration), the gaming machine 10 sets the probability setting value according to the ON/OFF states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112. It is possible to shift to various states such as a changeable setting variable state (setting change state, setting change mode) and a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the probability setting value is defined in, for example, six levels, and probability setting value 1 (setting 1), probability setting value 2 (setting 2), probability setting value 3 (setting 3), probability setting value 4 (setting) 4), probability setting value 5 (setting 5) and probability setting value 6 (setting 6). Generally, setting 1 is the most unfavorable setting for the player and setting 6 is the most unfavorable setting for the player. Settings 1 and 2 are low settings, settings 3 and 4 are intermediate settings (intermediate settings), and settings 5 and 6 are high settings.

In the probability setting changing process, every time the operator presses the RAM initialization switch 112, the work setting value (setting) in the work setting value area is set to 0 (setting 1, probability setting 1)→ Setting value 1 (Setting 2, probability setting value 2) → Setting value 2 (Setting 3, probability setting value 3) → Setting value 3 (Setting 4, probability setting value 4) → Setting value 4 (Setting 5, probability setting value 5) )→setting value 5 (setting 6, probability setting value 6)→setting value 0 (setting 1)→setting value 1 (setting 2)→... In this way, the RAM initialization switch 112 also functions as a set value change switch. For convenience of description, the work setting values 0 to 5 are provided corresponding to the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the setting changing state (setting changing mode), but the work setting value and the probability setting value are the same. They may be treated as the same by aligning with the numerical range (that is, 0 to 5 or 1 to 6) (the work setting value and the probability setting value are set to the same numerical value).

The probability setting value may be changed by rotating the setting key switch 93 to a predetermined position instead of operating the RAM initialization switch 112 (setting value changing switch). The probability setting value is not limited to 6 levels. The display probability setting value corresponding to the selected work setting value 0 to 5 is, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) display device 152. Etc. are displayed.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner. The RAM 111c is used as a work area of the CPU 111a and a storage area for various signals and random values at the time of game control, stores information about games (game information), and stores and retains the stored information even when a power failure occurs. It becomes a holding storage means capable of An electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c.

Further, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start-up memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, there are tables for determining the latter half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation pattern selection table, etc.) and the variation before the reach state. A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half variation pattern that is a pattern is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous for the player when the special result mode is achieved, some of the plurality of display results have already been derived and displayed. The display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derived display. Refers to the non-display mode. Then, for example, a state in which the variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state in which at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game varies a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas of the display device. After displaying, in the case of displaying the result form by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, the condition that satisfies the special result form (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same identification information May be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

Then, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and a normal reach (N reach) is provided as a system (type) of reach effects having a different possibility (a different expectation) of deriving a special result mode (big hit mode), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. It should be noted that the expectation level (expected value) of the jackpot is higher in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of sync). Therefore, the state in which the reach state is generated is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit, as compared with the case where the reach state is not generated.

The CPU 111a executes the game control program in the ROM 111b to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. Control of the whole 10 is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit random number of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, and a small hit for determining the small hit symbol. Design random number (only when there is a small hit), fluctuation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (including various reach and fluctuation display game execution time in fluctuation display without reach, etc.) A random number generation circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) and an update timing of the random number generation circuit for the CPU 111a based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. It has a clock generator that generates a clock.

Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a controls the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the number of starting memories. Based on the above, one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. Here, the CPU 111a serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit according to the prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to win the prize ball. Control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on a ball rental request signal from the card unit 600, and performs control for paying out the ball.

In the input section 120 of the game control device 100, a radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the universal figure starting gate 34, a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36. Connected to the switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37 (ordinary variable winning device), the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35, the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39, and these An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 for inputting a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from the switch and converting it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V is provided.

Further, the interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is connected to the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, and the out ball detection switch 74. The specific area switch 72 detects passage of a game ball (V winning) to the specific area 86 (V winning opening). The remaining ball outlet switch 73 detects a game ball that has passed through the remaining ball outlet for discharging the game ball from the special variation winning device 39. The out ball detection switch 74 may detect only the game ball passing through the out opening 30b, or may detect all the game balls that have been shot in the game area and finished the game.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123, the third input port 124, or the fourth input port 126 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are input to the third input port 124. ..

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the specific area switch 72, the remaining ball discharge port switch 73, or the out ball detection switch 74 are input to the fourth input port 126.

Further, in the second input port 123, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A signal from a front frame open detection switch 64 (main frame open detection switch) provided on the switch 63, the front frame 12 (main body frame), etc., and a signal from a vibration sensor 65 that detects vibration of the gaming machine 10 are input. ..

Further, the second input port 123 takes in the setting key switch signal from the setting key switch 93 and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

The data held by the third input port 124 is read by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 to assert the enable signal CE2 (change to a valid level). be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123, the fourth input port 126, and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, to the input unit 120, a frame radio wave incorrect signal output from the payout control device 200, a payout busy signal, a status signal indicating a payout abnormality, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow. The first input port 122 which takes in the overflow switch signal, the touch switch signal based on the input of the touch switch provided on the operation handle 24, and the signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 and supplies them to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 at a predetermined amount or more (full). The frame radio wave incorrect signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame), and whether the payout busy signal is in a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command. This is a signal indicating whether or not.

Further, the input section 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122, and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured.

In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test shot test device via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is performed so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited agency (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of the pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass product for sale) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starter switch output from the proximity I/F 121, is supplied to the test-shooting test device via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is, is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine controls the game. As an error signal indicating that the test is not possible, the error signal is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving a signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test-shooting test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. There is. The chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test device.

In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open a normal variation winning device 37 (a solenoid solenoid) 37c, a special variation winning device 39 to open a special winning opening solenoid 39b (large winning opening solenoid), A second output port 134 is provided for outputting the opening/closing data of the lever solenoid 86b that operates the lever to open the specific area 86.

In addition, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line connected to the cathode terminal of the LED is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and information related to the gaming machine 10 is externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a firing permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening/closing data signal of the universal electric solenoid 37c or the special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to generate and output a solenoid drive signal, which is a first driver (drive circuit). 138a, a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for a current supply side segment line of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 136. A third driver 138c that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71. Is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, and therefore the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

The second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line, and the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal through the digit line, thereby providing a dynamic driving method. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs selected in sequence and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since the data transmission/reception is performed using the serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the serial data (control data, lighting pattern data, character code (character code), etc.) output from the second output port 134, and displays the performance display device 152 (status display device). A driver 150 for driving is provided. In the present embodiment, the performance display device 152 includes a plurality (four) of 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) indicators (LED lamps), and the driver 150 is an LED driver. It is not limited to.

The performance display device 152 is provided on the game control device 100 (main board), but may be provided at another place. For example, the performance display device 152 can display, as a performance display, a display probability set value, a character ratio, a payout rate, and the number of discharged balls.

Here, the number of discharged balls is the number of game balls discharged from the game area 32 (also referred to as the number of out balls), and the number of game balls that have passed through the winning opening (the number of winnings) and the game that has passed through the out opening 30b. It is the sum of the number of spheres. The number of discharged balls can be obtained by counting the signal of the out-ball detecting switch 74 or the like. In the present embodiment, the winning openings are a general winning opening 35, a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting opening 1), an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting opening 2), and The special variation winning device 39 (big winning opening) is included.

The payout rate is a ratio (ratio) of the total number of prize balls to the number of discharged balls (or the number of shot balls), and is calculated by (number of acquired balls/number of discharged balls)×100(%). That is, the payout rate is the number of balls acquired (total number of prize balls) per 100 discharged balls.

For example, the winning character ratio is during the jackpot state, out of the total number of award balls (total number of award balls) obtained by winning the prize hole in a predetermined period (for example, from power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present). Is the ratio (%) of the number of prize balls (the number of balls acquired for each character) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=so-called continuous character ratio). The ratio of the prizes may be the ratio of the number of prize balls (during the big hit state and the small hit state) obtained by winning the big prize hole (=the big prize hole ratio) out of the total number of prize balls. Or, the ratio of the number of prize balls obtained by winning the large winning a prize and the ordinary variable winning a prize device 37 (the second starting winning a prize) (=the so-called character ratio (general character ratio) )).

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub-board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

The effect control device 300 is for displaying a video image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 including an amusement chip (IC) and the main control microcomputer 311 like the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

In the main control microcomputer 311, a program ROM 321 including a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that is retained even when power is not supplied during a power failure FeRAM 323 capable, RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect and instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduced sound, lights a decorative lamp, and drives the motor. And drive control of solenoids, management of production time, etc. are executed.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted and received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in parallel. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30, a synchronization signal for giving a data transmission timing. STS is input. It should be noted that the VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to INT and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as completion of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and the sound source LSI 314 is provided. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through the command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300, the effect control command signal (effect command) To receive as. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 has a signal level conversion function. There is.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the glass frame 15 are provided. A frame decoration LED control circuit 333 that drives and controls a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 or the like) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). The board decoration device 46 may include the lamp display device 80 described above.

These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15 may be provided.

Further, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, the touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and the motor in the board effect device 44. A function of detecting the on/off state of the performance accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the production control device 300. A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 supplies a direct current voltage of a desired level to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled by the same, and thus drives a motor and a solenoid. DC32V, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor and an LED, and DC5V serving as a power supply voltage of the command I/F 331, and a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, an LED and a speaker are generated. Is configured to.

Further, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC- for generating DC3.3V or DC1.2V based on DC5V is used. A DC converter is provided in effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 and puts the device in the reset state. In addition, in the form of being output from the main control microcomputer 311, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the tone generator LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET that drive and control the lamp and the motor). Signal) to put them in a reset state. Further, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling fan 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts the random number value for hit determination of the general figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the general figure starting gate 34 to extract the ROM 111b. Is compared with the judgment value stored in, and it is judged whether or not the general figure variation display game is hit.

Then, on the public figure display device 53, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the public figure variability display game is displayed in a stopped state. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the universal figure indicator 53, the universal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the regular variation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, , 0.3 seconds) The opening control is performed as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the general figure fluctuation display game is off, control is performed to display the result mode of the off on the general figure display device 53.

In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, the starting winning (starting memory) is stored, and the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is based on the starting memory. The random number for use is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game has missed.

In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on the starting memory, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game. Is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51 or the special figure 2 display device 52, the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game region 32 into the starting winning region (first starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37). Make up.

Further, the effect control device 300 displays the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 300 performs the process of setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, controlling light emission of various LEDs, and the like, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game or the like).

Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates the special game state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a controls, for example, by opening the opening/closing door 39c of the special variation winning device 39 with the special winning opening solenoid 39b to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening. ..

Either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are won in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the special winning opening until such condition is achieved, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times, 11 times or 2 times) (repetition) control (cycle game) I do. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is off, control is performed to display the deviation result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51 and the special figure 2 display device 52.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability change state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of the special figure variable display game, that is, the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game, Both are in high probability states.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed such that the universal figure variation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are set to the time saving operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than that in the normal variation winning device 37 being in the normal operation state. Since it is controlled so that the opening time of is substantially increased, it becomes the universal communication support state. It should be noted that even in the high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the time-saving state is duplicated and the ordinary electric power support is executed.

For example, in the time-saving state, it is possible to perform a time-shortening variation in which the execution time of the above-mentioned universal figure variation display game (general figure variation time) is changed to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, (10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure variation display game (special figure variation time) is shortened as compared with the normal time, and the time reduction variation of the special figure variation display game is also executed.

Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure variation display game to be the second stop time (eg 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (eg 1604 msec). Is.

Further, in the time saving state, when the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal communication opening time) is the first opening time in the normal state (for example, 100 msec). It is possible to control such that the second opening time is longer than that (for example, 1352 msec).

Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal variation winning device 37 is opened (the number of ordinary electric open times) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, two times) with respect to one hit result of the universal figure variation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number (for example, 4 times). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the universal figure changing display game (general figure probability) to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, the general variation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. As a result, in the time saving state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set so as not to be opened in the normal operation state (universal figure probability is 0). Moreover, you may make it select either the 1st opening aspect or the 2nd opening aspect when it becomes a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the time-saving state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur.

[Transition state when power is turned on]
As described above, depending on the on/off state of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 when the power is turned on, the state shifts to four states (modes).

When the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 93 are turned on when the power is turned on, the probability setting value (setting value) is changed to a setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed. (See A1027-A1036 in FIG. 5B and FIG. 6B).

Next, when the setting key switch 93 is turned on but the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned off when the power is turned on, the state shifts to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the probability setting value can be confirmed (Fig. 5B, A1031-A1036 and FIG. 6B).

If the setting key switch 93 is off but the RAM initialization switch 112 is on when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization state (RAM clear mode) is entered and the RAM initialization process (RAM clear) is performed. (Processing) is executed and the RAM 111c is initialized (see A1042-1044 in FIG. 5B).

When the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are turned off when the power is turned on, the normal power recovery state (normal power recovery mode) is entered, and the power is simply restored.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 9 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 5A and 5B are flowcharts showing the procedure of main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the code (number) of the step is represented as “A***”.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when starting the main process, the game control device 100 first executes a process of prohibiting interruption (A1001). Further, a stack pointer setting process for setting the stack pointer which is the top address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when the interrupt occurs (A1002).

Subsequently, the register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to the prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 (A1006). That is, the signals from the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read.

Further, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the device normally starts is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

Further, the power supply delay timer counts time using a storage area (RAM area or register, etc. which is not the target of validity determination) that is not the target of RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). As a result, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

By reading the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 before the start of the standby time, the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 can be reliably detected. That is, if the states of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are read after the waiting time has elapsed, the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are operated after the waiting time has elapsed, or the power is turned on. It is necessary to continue to operate the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 from the time until the waiting time elapses. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, a situation in which the operations of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112, which are performed when the power is turned on, cannot be accepted without performing such a troublesome operation. It can be prevented.

When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes a process of measuring a standby time and a process of monitoring occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1010).

When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not a power failure occurs by reading a power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via a port and a data bus. (A1008). When a power failure occurs (result of A1008 is “Y”), the game machine waits until the power is cut off.

When the power failure has not occurred (the result of A1008 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by -1 (A1009), and determines whether the value of the timer is 0 or not. Yes (A1010). If the value of the timer is not 0 (result of A1010 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to step A1008.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a malfunction at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents when the power was last turned off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the value of the timer is 0 (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when the waiting time is over, the game control device 100 can read/write RWM (read/write) such as RAM or EEPROM. Access to the memory is permitted (A1011), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1012).

Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port mounted in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1013). ).

Further, here, the driver 150 that drives the performance display device 152 (state display device) may be initialized. The game control device 100 writes a command including control data corresponding to the contents of the initial setting in the transmission buffer of the second output port 134 (serial communication circuit) and transmits it to the driver 150. For example, the game control device 100 sets the duty ratio in the initial setting. The duty ratio corresponds to the brightness of each LED (each segment) of the performance display device 152. The game control device 100 sets the number of used digits of the performance display device 152 in the initial setting. In this embodiment, the number of used digits is four.

Next, the game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1014). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, the RAM 111c) (A1015). Here, the abnormality premise flag is temporarily set in a predetermined register.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1016). If it is normal (result of A1016 is “Y”), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1017).

Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), the game control device 100 calculates a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (for example, a game control work area). Calculation processing is executed (A1018), and it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1019). If the checksums match (result of A1019 is “Y”), the RAM is normal and the RAM abnormality flag indicating abnormality of the RAM is cleared (A1020). Then, the process proceeds to step A1021.

Further, when the game control device 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1016 is “N” or the result of A1017 is “N”), the checksums do not match. (The result of A1019 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1021 without clearing the RAM abnormality flag.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (A1021). When both switches are ON (result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to a setting variable state (setting change mode), and executes the process of changing probability setting in steps A1027-A1037. ..

When at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (the result of A1021 is "N"), the game control device 100 sets a RAM abnormality flag indicating an abnormality of the RAM (here, RAM111c). It is determined whether it has been done (A1022). When the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A1023). When the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is “N”), the process of confirming probability setting of step A1031-A1037 (during setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode), step A1041-1044 The RAM initialization processing (RAM clear processing) or the normal power-on processing (at power restoration) of steps A1041, A1045, and A1046 is executed.

When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1023 is “Y”), the game control device 100 informs that the game control device 100 (main board, main board) has an abnormality. An error notification command is transmitted to effect control device 300 (A1024). The effect control device 300, which has received the command for informing the main abnormality error, informs that there is an abnormality in the game control device 100.

Next, the game control device 100 causes the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 to display the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (data of error display of “E1” in FIG. 9C) on the performance display device 152. To (A1025). Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying an abnormality to an external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer), information collecting terminal, etc.) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, the processing of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated, and the operation waits until the power is turned on by performing the setting change operation (turning on both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) again. While the process of steps A1025 and A1026 is repeated and waiting, the interrupt remains disabled (A1001), and the timer interrupt process capable of executing the special figure 1 and 2 game processing and the general figure game processing is executed. Since (FIG. 7) cannot be executed, a game (special figure variation display game, general figure variation display game) cannot be executed.

In this way, it is determined that there is an abnormality when the probability setting changing flag is set even though the setting changing operation (the ON operation of both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112) is not executed. , A1024-A1026 are executed. For example, if the power is turned off and restarted while the probability setting is being changed (before the setting change is completed), the probability setting changing flag may be set even though the setting changing operation has not been executed. is there.

On the other hand, even when the RAM abnormality flag is set (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the game control device 100 notifies the game control device 100 (main board) of the abnormality by the main abnormality error notification. The command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (A1024), and the 7-segment display data when the game is stopped (error display data of "E1" in FIG. 9C) is output to the driver 150 of the performance display device 152 (A1025). ), ON data of the security signal is output to the external information terminal 71 to notify the external device of the RAM abnormality (A1026). Note that, similarly to the above, even when the information about the big hit remains in the RAM 111c, other signals such as the big hit signal to the external information terminal 71 are maintained in the off state. After that, the processes of steps A1025 and A1026 are repeated and the process stands by.

When both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are on (the result of A1021 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process of changing the probability setting (during the setting variable state). First, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag is set (A1027). If the RAM abnormality flag is set (result of A1027 is “Y”), it is unknown whether the probability setting value is correct, so the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c is cleared. After setting the initial value (for example, the lowest setting value "1") (A1028), the probability setting changing flag indicating that the probability setting is being changed is set (A1029). If the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1027 is “N”), the probability setting changing flag is set without clearing the probability setting value (A1029). Next, the command whose probability setting is being changed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1030), and the process proceeds to step A1034. Note that the effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being changed.

In the game control device 100, at least one of the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1021 is “N”), and the RAM abnormality flag is not set (result of A1022 is “N”). ), and when the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A1023 is "N"), it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is on (A1031). When the setting key switch 93 is on (the result of A1031 is “Y”), the RAM initialization switch 112 is off, and the probability setting confirmation process (during the setting confirmation state) is started. A probability setting confirmation flag indicating that the setting is being confirmed is set (A1032). Then, the command for which the probability setting is being confirmed is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1033), and the process proceeds to step A1034. The effect control device 300 that has received the command for changing the probability setting notifies the display device 41 or the like that the probability setting is being confirmed.

After step A1030 or step A1033, the game control device 100 executes the processing of steps A1034 to A1040 as common processing during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation.

The game control device 100 first saves 128 ms (predetermined time) in the security signal control timer area in order to output the security signal during the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation (A1034). The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the probability setting change/confirmation process (FIG. 6B) described later, but when the probability setting change or the probability setting confirmation ends early, the remaining The counting of the security signal control timer and the output of the security signal are executed in the external information editing process (A1321). During the probability setting change and the probability setting confirmation, the security signal is output for at least 50 ms.

Next, the game control device 100 permits interruption (A1035). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed. Then, it is determined whether the setting key switch 93 is off (A1036). When the setting key switch 93 is on (result of A1036 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1037). If no power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to step A1036. On the other hand, when a power failure has occurred (result of A1037 is “Y”), the process at the time of power failure of steps A1055-A1061 is executed.

As described above, as long as the setting key switch 93 is on and a power failure has not occurred, it is possible to confirm the setting variable state (setting changing state, setting changing mode) in which the probability setting value can be changed, or the probability setting value. The setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) continues.

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1036 is “Y”), the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1038) and issues a notification end command to the effect control device 300 (effect control board). (A1039). In addition, the effect control device 300 that has received the notification end command ends the notification that the probability setting is being confirmed or the notification that the probability setting is being changed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set, that is, whether or not the probability setting is being changed so far (A1040). If the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A1040 is "Y"), that is, if the probability setting is being changed so far, the RAM initialization process (to be described later) of steps A1042-A1044 is executed. To do. On the other hand, when the probability setting changing flag is not set (the result of A1040 is “N”), that is, when the probability setting is being confirmed so far, when the power is turned on after step A1045 (when the power is restored). Perform the normal processing of.

When the setting key switch 93 is off (result of A1031 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (A1041). When the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (result of A1041 is “Y”), the RAM area other than the probability setting value area for storing the probability setting value is cleared to 0 in the RAM 111c (A1042). That is, the game information stored in the RAM 111c is cleared to 0 except for the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting changing flag is also cleared here. In addition to the probability setting value area, it is also possible to configure such that the stack area and unused area are not cleared, or the work area and stack area related to performance information and its display (performance display) are not cleared. .. The performance information is derived on the basis of the number of prize balls obtained by winning. For example, the payout rate, the base value (the payout rate in the normal gaming state), the ratio of the winning character, the number of discharged balls, etc. is there.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1043). Then, the command for RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1044), and the process proceeds to step A1047.

On the other hand, when the RAM initialization switch 112 is off (result of A1041 is “N”), the game control device 100 is a normal power source because both the setting key switch 93 and the RAM initialization switch 112 are off. The processing at the time of turning on (when the power is restored) is started, and the power failure restoration processing is executed (A1045). For example, the initial value at the time of power recovery (when power is restored) is saved in the area to be initialized. Further, the above-mentioned probability setting confirmation flag is also cleared here. Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (effect control board) (A1046), and step A1047. Process shifts to.

The command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 and the command for restoration of power failure transmitted in the process of step A1046 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine and suspension of special figures 1 and 2. Number of decoration special figure 1 hold number command and decoration special figure 2 hold number command, probability state command (probability state or low probability state) or probability information command indicating presence/absence of time saving state, special figure variation in predetermined production mode An effect number information command indicating the number of times the display game has been executed, and a power failure recovery command indicating that the power has been turned on are included.

Further, in the command at the time of RAM initialization and the command at the time of power failure recovery, a setting value information command (probability setting value information) indicating setting value information (setting information) which is information of the probability setting value (setting value) of the gaming machine 10. Command) is included. The game control device 100 need only transmit the setting value information command to the effect control device 300 only once when the power is restored (turned on), and thereafter, the effect control device 300 refers to the setting value information stored by itself. You can control production.

The RAM initialization command also includes a RAM initialization command (RAM clear command). Upon receiving the RAM initialization command, the production control device 300 displays a customer waiting demo on the display device 41, and notifies the RAM initialization (RAM clear) 30 by the sound of the LED and the speaker of the panel decoration device 46 or the like. Do it for a second. In addition, the command at the time of restoration from a power failure includes a screen designation command that designates the display content of the screen of the display device 41. Note that the screen designation command is a customer waiting demo command during normal processing (when it is neither changing nor hitting) for both special figures 1 and 2, and is a restoration screen command otherwise.

After step A1044 or step A1046, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1047). Specifically, the CPU 111a sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposed pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

The bit transposition pattern is the method of exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). Is a pattern that determines.

In the present embodiment, by exchanging the bits of the random number according to the bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (the big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol) Initial value (big hit symbol initial value random number), initial value of small hit symbol random number that determines small hit symbol (small hit symbol initial value random number) (only when there is small hit), hit random number that determines hit of general figure Save as a start value of an initial value (random initial value random number), an initial value of a falling lottery random number used in a falling lottery (falling random number initial value random number, etc.) in a predetermined area of the RWM (A1048), and allow interruption (A1049). ). Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time the power is turned on, this value is used as the start value (initial value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the initial value random number updating process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1050). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are configured to be generated using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. There is. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. This is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt processing) that has the same cycle as the processing.

In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the hit symbol random number, the falling lottery random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" is used in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) each time the random number makes a round. ing. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter method with +1 or 1, or may be a random method update in which all the values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the falling lottery random number are random numbers that are updated by hardware and software.

Next, the game control device 100 prohibits interruption (A1051), and executes performance display editing processing for editing performance information and its display (performance display) (A1052). Here, the performance information (such as the character ratio and the payout rate) may be calculated. If the RAM abnormality flag is set in the register, the work area and the stack area related to the performance information and its display (performance display) may be cleared (if not cleared in step A1042). After that, the interrupt is permitted (A1053). As a result, the timer interrupt process (FIG. 7) can be executed.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred (A1054). When no power failure has occurred (result of A1054 is “N”), the process returns to step A1050. As a result, the processing of steps A1050-A1054 is repeated until a power failure occurs.

When a power failure occurs (result of A1054 is “Y”), the game control device 100 starts the process at the time of power failure, temporarily interrupts (A1055), and outputs off data to all output ports ( 1056). After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1057), and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1058). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum at the time of power-off of the RWM is executed (A1059), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1060). Finally, a process of prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1061), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is cut off.

In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is cut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6A is a flowchart showing a procedure of timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program). The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as the register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM start address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the registers used in the main process. When the timer interrupt process is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

Next, the game control device 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capture of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Next, it is determined whether the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed, based on the probability setting changing flag and the probability setting confirming flag (A1304). When the probability setting is being changed or the probability setting is being confirmed (the result of A1304 is “Y”), the probability setting changing/confirming process for changing or confirming the probability setting value is executed (A1305).

When the probability setting is not being changed or the probability setting is not being confirmed (result of A1304 is “N”), the game control device 100 uses an actuator such as a solenoid (eg, a special winning opening solenoid 39b) based on the output data set in various processes. The output processing for performing the drive control of the LED and the drive control of the LED (light emission control) is executed (A1306). When the firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a payout command transmission process of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer to the payout control device 200 in various processes (A1307), and further, a random number update process 1 (A1308), a random number update. Process 2 (A1309) is executed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a, and the error monitoring (the front frame and the glass frame are opened) A winning opening switch/state monitoring process is performed (A1310).

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not abnormal discharge of game balls is occurring at the special winning opening (A1311). When the abnormal discharge occurrence flag is set by the abnormal discharge monitoring process (A1318) described later, it can be determined that abnormal discharge is occurring. When abnormal discharge is occurring (result of A1311 is “Y”), the processes of step A1315 and thereafter are executed.

When the abnormal discharge is not occurring (the result of A1311 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure game process for performing the process related to the special figure variation display game (A1312). The details of the special figure game process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a universal figure game process for performing a process related to the universal figure variation display game (A1313). A segment LED edit process for driving a segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 for displaying a special figure variation game and various information regarding a game so as to display desired contents is executed (A1314).

Further, the game control device 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process of checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1315). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether a detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is normal or not is executed (A1316).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a vibration fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraud caused by vibration based on the input from the vibration sensor 65 (A1317). Next, an abnormal discharge monitoring process for monitoring abnormal discharge from the special winning opening is executed (A1318). In the abnormal discharge monitoring process, the abnormal discharge of the special variation winning device 39 is performed based on the input from the special winning opening switch 39a, the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch), and the remaining ball outlet switch 73 in the special variation winning device 39. Is monitored, and the abnormal discharge in-progress flag is set when abnormal discharge occurs. The game ball that has passed through the special winning opening switch 39a of the special variation winning device 39 is discharged through the specific area switch 72 (V winning opening switch) or the remaining ball discharging switch 73.

Next, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in an output buffer (A1319). Then, a performance display monitor control process for controlling the display of the performance display device 152 is executed (A1320). After that, the timer interrupt processing ends.

Note that when the timer interrupt processing returns, restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of the register bank specification is configured to be performed automatically. However, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are enabled after the external information editing processing. It is also possible to perform the processing for returning or the processing for returning the designation of the register bank to the register bank 0.

[Probability setting change/confirmation process]
Next, details of the probability setting change/confirmation process (A1305) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 6B is a flowchart showing a procedure of probability setting change/confirmation processing. In the probability setting change/confirmation process, the probability setting value can be changed or confirmed.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range (A2401). The probability setting value here is stored in the probability setting value area of the RAM 111c.

When the probability setting value is within the normal range (result of A2401 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value (A2402), and the performance display device 152. To the driver via the driver 150 (A2404). When the probability setting value is not within the normal range (result of A2401 is “N”), the extinction data is set as the probability setting value display data (A2403) and is output to the performance display device 152 via the driver 150 (A2404). ).

Here, the probability setting value display data is data of the display probability setting value displayed on the performance display device 152, and is stored in the probability setting value display data area. In order to prevent confusion among hall-related persons, if the probability setting values are different but the same big hit probability (and small hit probability), the display probability setting value is associated with the big hit probability (and small hit probability). May be the same. That is, the same display probability setting value may mean the same big hit probability (and small hit probability).

Next, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A2405). The security signal control timer is 128 ms (predetermined time) set in step A1034. Then, the ON data of the security signal for notifying the abnormality to the external device (game hall internal management device (hall computer) or the like) is output to the external information terminal 71 (A1026). Here, other signals to the external information terminal 71, such as the big hit signal, are maintained in the off state.

After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the probability setting changing flag is set (A2407). If the probability setting changing flag is not set (result of A2407 is “N”), that is, if the probability setting is being confirmed, the probability setting changing/confirming process is terminated without doing anything.

When the probability setting changing flag is set (the result of A2407 is “Y”), that is, when the probability setting is being changed, the game control device 100 is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not (A2408). If it is the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is “Y”), the probability setting change/confirmation process is terminated. This is to prevent the probability setting value from being unintentionally updated when the RAM initialization switch 112 is kept pressed.

When it is not the first timer interrupt process after the power is turned on (result of A2408 is "N"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the RAM initialization switch 112 (A2409). If there is no input from the RAM initialization switch (result of A2409 is "N"), the probability setting change/confirmation processing ends.

When the RAM initialization switch 112 is input (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the work setting value in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) in the range of 0 to 5. +1 is updated, and the probability setting values 1 to 6 in the probability setting value area are updated by +1 corresponding to the work setting value (A2410). As a result, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is updated by one. After that, the probability setting change/confirmation process ends. A value corresponding to the probability setting value read from the probability setting value area (1 from the probability setting value is stored in the work setting value area (in the RAM 111c or the register) for storing the work setting value when the setting change mode is entered. The subtracted value) may be stored.

In the above description, each time the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, the probability setting value in the probability setting value area is directly updated corresponding to the update of the work setting value. However, the work setting value of the RAM 111c is updated. When the setting key switch 93 is turned off and the setting change work is completed (the result of A1036 is “Y”), the probability setting value (work setting value) being changed is stored in the area, and the work setting is performed. A value corresponding to the work setting value in the value area may be stored in the probability setting value area for the first time. By doing this, when a power failure occurs during the setting change (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the probability setting value used in the game control, the effect control, etc. (the probability setting value stored in the probability setting value area) (Value) can be prevented from being changed with an unintended value.

[Special game processing]
Next, details of the special figure game process (A1312) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special figure game processing, the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire processing relating to the special figure changing display game is controlled, and the display of the special drawing is set.

The game control device 100 first executes a starting opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a gaming ball wins the starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variation winning device 37 that constitutes the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special figure fluctuation display based on the winning is displayed. Prior to the start of the game, a game result pre-judgment is performed in which the game result based on the winning prize is pre-judged. The details of the starting port switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A2603). The special figure game processing timer is clocked for the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (result of A2604 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A2619.

The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game processing number when the special figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired. The special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game processing number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is executed by the special figure game processing number to execute a game branching process corresponding to the special figure game processing number (A2607).

When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control device 100 monitors the variation start of the special figure variation display game to set the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the effect setting, and the like. The special figure normal processing for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). The details of the special figure normal process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special display stop display time and information necessary for performing the special figure display process. The process during figure fluctuation is executed (A2609). For example, in the special symbol changing process, necessary information such as a symbol stop command indicating a stop of the special symbol and a stop display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set, and the process number "2" relating to the special symbol displaying process is set. Set it and save it in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game processing number is "2" in step A2607, if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the game control device 100 sets a fanfare command according to the kind of big hit, and each big hit. The special figure displaying process for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing, etc. is executed (A2610). For example, in the special figure display processing, if the result of the special figure change display game is a big hit, necessary information such as the fanfare command and fanfare time is set, and the processing number "3" related to the processing during the fanfare/interval is set. Save it in the special figure game processing number area. If the result of the special figure variation display game is not a big hit, the process number "0" related to the special figure normal process is set and saved in the special figure game process number area.

When the game process number is "3" in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets information necessary for setting the opening time of the special winning opening, updating the number of times of opening, and performing the process during opening of the special winning opening. A fanfare/interval processing for setting and the like is executed (A2611). For example, in the fanfare/interval processing, necessary information such as the round command corresponding to the round of the round to be executed and the opening time of the special winning opening is set, and the processing number "4" relating to the processing during the opening of the special winning opening is set. Set it and save it in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if it is the final round, The special winning opening opening process is executed to set information necessary for performing the special winning hole remaining ball process (A2612). For example, in the processing for opening the special winning opening, necessary information such as an interval command and an ending command is set, and the processing number "5" related to the processing for remaining large winning opening balls is set and saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, The special winning opening remaining ball process for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit ending process is executed (A2613). For example, in the process of opening the special winning opening, if it is not the final round, the interval time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, and the processing number "3" relating to the fanfare/interval processing is set to the special figure game processing number area. Save. If it is the final round, the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area, the processing number "6" related to the big hit end processing is set, and the ending time is saved in the special figure game processing number area.

When the game process number is "6" in step A2607, the game control device 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure normal process (A2614). For example, in the jackpot end process, based on the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number (big hit symbol number) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state after the jackpot state ends or the Poden support state after the jackpot state ends ( Necessary information such as a time saving state is set, a process number "0" related to special figure normal processing is set, and the special figure game process number area is saved. The probability variation judgment data includes the number of continuous games (probability state (high probability/low probability)) after the big hit state ends, and number of continuous games (time shortening change count, power support count) in the Hoden support state (time saving state) after the big hit state ends. ) Information is included.

When the processing based on the special figure game process number is finished, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display device 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display device. The symbol variation control process relating to 51 is executed (A2616). Then, after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control process relating to the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618).

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

The game control device 100 first prepares a winning prize monitoring table for the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and determines whether or not there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36. It is determined (A2703). If there is no winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is "N"), the processing from step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning in the starting winning opening 36 (result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during special time saving (during normal power support state) (A2704).

When the game control device 100 determines that it is not during special time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A2704 is “N”), the process of step A2707 and subsequent steps is executed. On the other hand, when it is during special time saving (during normal communication support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), right-handing instruction notification command is prepared as a production command (A2705), and production command setting processing is executed ( A2706). In the effect command setting process, the effect command is written in the serial transmission buffer, and the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

That is, in the normal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high-probability state/low-probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handing instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. .. In the case of the present embodiment, it is easier for the left winning to enter the starting winning opening 36, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not to win the winning unless it is right hitting. Also, the game ball does not pass through the universal figure starting gate 34 unless it is hit to the right. Therefore, in the normal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but if there is a winning at the start winning port 36 during the normal power support state (that is, in the normal power support state When left-handed), the right-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes the notification (warning) for instructing the right-handing by the display device 41 or the like.

Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and then executes special figure starting opening switch common processing (A2708). Then, a winning monitor table for the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning apparatus 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. The determination is made (A2711). When there is no winning in the second starting winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the starting opening switch monitoring processing is ended.

On the other hand, the game control device 100, if there is a winning in the second start winning hole (the result of A2711 is "Y"), whether or not the ordinary electric auditors (ordinary variation winning device 37) is operating. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which a winning can be made (A2712). When the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

On the other hand, when the normal electric auditors product is not in operation (result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the illegal electric power generation is occurring (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraudulent occurrence determination number (for example, 5), it is determined that the regular electric fraud is occurring. The normal variable winning device 37 cannot win the game ball in the closed state, and can only win the game ball in the open state. Therefore, if the game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the fraudulent winning number. If the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or larger than the predetermined fraud determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In the case where the illegality of normal electric power generation is not occurring (the result of A2713 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning a prize mouth (normal variation winning device 37) (A2714). Then, the special figure starting port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. In addition, when it is determined in A2713 that the unauthorized use of general electric power is occurring (the result of A2713 is "Y"), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second starting memory is not generated any more.

[Common processing for special drawing start switch]
Next, details of the special figure starting port switch common process (A2708, A2715) in the starting port switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure starting port switch common processing. The special figure starting port switch common process is a process commonly performed for each input when the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are input.

The game control device 100 first outputs the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the management device outside the game machine 10. Is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output frequency overflows (A2903). If the output count does not overflow (result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal output count area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", the value after updating becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of special figure reservations (starting memory number) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored among the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit value. It is determined (A2905). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A2905 is "N"), the special figure starting port switch common processing ends. If the number of reserved special maps to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of reserved special maps to be updated (the number of reserved special maps 1 or the number of reserved special maps 2) is updated by +1. Then, (A2906), the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2907).

Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting mouth switch and the special figure reservation number to be monitored (A2908), and stores the jackpot random number prepared in step A2805 in the RWM jackpot random number. Save in the area (A2909). Next, the big hit symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2910), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2911).

Next, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2912), and executes the special figure reservation information determination process (A2913). In the special figure hold information determination process, the pre-reading stop design command corresponding to the stop design information based on the saved big hit random number or big hit design random number, and the first half fluctuation number (number of fluctuation before reach) based on the saved fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 And the pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the latter half variation number (number of variation after reach) is set as an effect command. Then, a starter switch to be monitored and a decorative special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure reservation number are prepared as a performance command (A2914), and a performance command setting process (A2915) is executed to make the special figure starting switch common. The process ends.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning area and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variation display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit for the starting storage is provided. Further, the starting storage means (game control device 100) uses various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36) as a first starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit. The various random number values that are stored and extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (ordinary variation winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Regular processing of special drawings]
Next, details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal process.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding number (second starting memory number) is 0 (A3201). When the special figure 2 reservation number is 0 (result of A3201 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is 0 (A3206). Then, if the number of reserved special characters 1 is 0 (the result of A3206 is “Y”), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (A3211), and if the customer waiting demo is not started (A3211). If the result is “N”), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3212).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a customer waiting demo command as an effect command (A3213), performs an effect command setting process (A3214), and proceeds to the process of step A3215. On the other hand, in step A3211, if the customer waiting demo has been started (result of A3211 is "Y"), "0" relating to special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (A3215), and the special figure game processing number is set. The processing number is saved in the area (A3216), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3217). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A3218), and the special figure normal process is ended.

If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (A3201 result is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) to display the special figure 2 hold number. A figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 2 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3203), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3204). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting processing of special figure 2 is executed (A3205), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (A3206 result is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variation start process (A3207) to display the special figure 1 hold number. A figure reservation number command (decorative special figure 1 reservation number command) is prepared as an effect command (A3208), and effect command setting processing is executed (A3209). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting processing of special figure 1 is executed (A3210), and the special figure normal processing is ended.

In this way, the special figure 2 pending number is checked before the special figure 1 pending number is checked, and when the special figure 2 pending number is not 0, the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) is executed. The Rukoto. That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variable display game. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display game based on the first start memory. It forms a priority control means that is executed with priority over the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (A3207) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 variation start process. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game.

The game control device 100 saves the special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol determination area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) related to the special figure 1 variable display game (A3403). In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, the stop symbol number at the time of the outfall or the big hit and the loss stop symbol pattern or the big hit stop symbol pattern corresponding to this stop symbol number are saved. Then, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is executed. Also, the round number information (round upper limit value) corresponding to the stopped symbol number and the probability variation determination data corresponding to the stopped symbol number are acquired and saved.

Furthermore, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern (A3404).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information relating to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Next, the game control device 100 executes variation start information setting processing for setting variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 variation start processing. In the fluctuation start information setting processing, the fluctuation time value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is acquired and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as an effect command, and effect command setting processing is performed. Further, in the fluctuation start information setting process, the special figure reservation number associated with the special figure classification (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the special figure variation display game to be started is updated by -1 (decrement by 1).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (A3202) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 variation start process. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game, and is the same process as the process of the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

The game control device 100 first saves a special figure 2 variation flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the variation symbol determination area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

Next, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) regarding the special figure 2 variable display game (A3503). Further, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is executed (A3504). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing various kinds of information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Finally, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 variation start process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3602), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3603). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure starting storage with the earliest digestion order (here, the earliest in special figure 1). Then, the jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed depending on whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3604).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3604) is a jackpot (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 1 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3601. It saves (A3606), and ends the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3605) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is any one of “big hit” and “outlier”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 variation start process will be described. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as the process of setting the big hit flag 1 shown in FIG. 13 is performed for the second starting memory.

The game control device 100 first saves the deviation information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, the big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0. (A3703). The reserved number 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special figure starting storage in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot is executed according to whether or not the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (A3704).

When the determination result of the jackpot determination process (A3704) is a jackpot (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the jackpot information in the jackpot flag 2 area where the deviation information is saved in step A3701. It saves (A3706) and ends the jackpot flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is any one of “big hit” and “outlier”.

[Big hit determination processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot determination processing (A3605, A3704) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing, the jackpot flag 2 setting processing, and the like will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The big hit judging process is a process common to the big hit judging process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process, and is also executed in step A3004 of the special figure reservation information judging process.

The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and when the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value, and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a deviation (other than the big hit) as a judgment result (A3807), and ends the big hit judgment process. To do.

In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control device 100 judges whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state). (A3803). If it is in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3805).

After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the game control device 100 judges whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the jackpot determination process ends.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting processing (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure information setting process. In the present embodiment, the probability state (low probability/high probability, with/without time saving) does not directly affect the distribution of fluctuations, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the distribution of fluctuations. As the effect mode, one effect mode among a plurality of effect modes is set in accordance with the probability state, the presence/absence of a time saving state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

The game control device 100 first sets the first-half variation group selection pointer table (A4201) and acquires the first-half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4202). Next, the first half variable group selection offset table is set (A4203), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number (special figure 1 reservation number or special figure 2 reservation number) and stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4204). ..

Next, the game control device 100 adds the first half variable group selection pointer and the offset data (A4205), and saves the value obtained by the addition in the variable distribution information 1 area (A4206). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 area is saved with the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of the stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode. This variation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for allocating the first half variation (variation mode before the start of reach), and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, depending on the specifications of the model, the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number of holdings, but when there are other holdings, as a result, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuations. Note that a fluctuation group includes multiple fluctuation patterns.When determining a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from this fluctuation group. ing.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the latter half variation group selection pointer table (A4207) and acquires the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information (A4208). Next, the latter half variable group selection offset table is set (A4209), and the offset data corresponding to the target special figure reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (A4210).

Next, the game control device 100 adds the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data (A4211), saves the value obtained by the addition in the variation allocation information 2 area (A4212), and sets the special figure information. The process ends. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of holdings, and the effect mode is saved. This variation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for allocating the latter half variation (reach type (including reach)) and is used later for selecting a variation group. However, since the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of pending calls only in the case of failure (reach occurrence rate decreases when the number of pending tasks is large), in cases other than failure, as a result, the number of pending calls is distributed in the latter half of the fluctuation. Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting processing (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 variation start processing and the special figure 2 variation start processing will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

The variation patterns are the first half variation pattern which is a variation mode from the start of the special figure variation display game to the reach state, and the second half variation pattern which is the variation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The first half variation pattern is set after the latter half variation pattern is set.

The game control device 100 first sets the fluctuation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the latter half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 and prepares (A4302), and the target fluctuation pattern random number. The variable pattern random number 1 is loaded from one storage area (for one reserved number) and prepared (A4303). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half variation group table is different between the hitting and the non-hit. Specifically, the hit type has a 1-byte size, and the loss type has a 2-byte size. Since the hit occurrence rate is lower than the outfall occurrence rate and one byte is sufficient, the hit size is 1 byte in size from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity. Therefore, at the time of winning, only the lower value of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 of 2 bytes is used. Further, the occurrence rate of deviating is higher than the rate of occurrence of hitting, and in order to make more diverse effects appear, the size for deviating is 2 bytes.

Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is off (A4304), and if it is off (result of A4304 is “Y”), performs 2-byte allocation processing (A4305). Then, the process proceeds to step A4307. If it is not out of alignment (result of A4304 is “N”), distribution processing (A4306) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A4307.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires the address of the latter half variation selection table (second half variation pattern selection table) obtained as a result of the distribution, prepares it (A4307), and stores the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding). The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the formula 1) and prepared (A4308). Then, the distribution processing is executed (A4309), the second half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variation number area is saved (A4310). By this processing, the latter half variation pattern is set.

Next, the game control device 100 sets the first half fluctuation group table (A4311), and calculates the table selection pointer based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (A4312). Then, the address of the first-half fluctuation selection table (first-half fluctuation pattern selection table) corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (A4313), and the fluctuation pattern random number is stored from the target fluctuation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of reservations 1). 3 is loaded and prepared (A4314). After that, the distribution process (A4315) is performed, the first-half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the first-half variation number area is saved (A4316), and the variation pattern setting process is ended. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a mode of executing the game, from a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sorting process]
Next, details of the 2-byte allocation processing (A4305) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the procedure of 2-byte allocation processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

The game control device 100 first checks whether the leading data of the selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without distribution (that is, “0”) (A4401). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, but defines only the latter half fluctuation selection table in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, a part of the variable group table when the result is out of order), it is not necessary to sort, so the sorting value “0”, that is, the code without sorting is defined at the beginning. ..

Then, when the top data of the selection table (second half variation group table) is a code without distribution (result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then, (A4407), the 2-byte allocation process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the selection table (latter half variation group table) is not the code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), the first distribution specified in the selection table (latter half variation group table). A value is acquired (A4403).

Subsequently, the distribution value acquired in step A4403 is subtracted from the random value prepared in step A4303 (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) to calculate a new random value (A4404), and the calculated new random value is calculated. Is smaller than "0" (A4405). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403, Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second half variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405 to generate a new random value. A numerical value is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4405).

The above-described processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "Y"). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table). When it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result is updated (A4407) and 2 bytes. The sorting process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution processing (A4306, A4309, A4315) in the fluctuation pattern setting processing will be described. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. In the distribution processing, the second half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is selected from the second half variation selection table (second half variation pattern group) based on the variation pattern random number 2 or the first half variation selection table (based on the variation pattern random number 3 ( This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

First, the game control device 100 first data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in A4302, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A4307, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A4313). It is checked whether is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table are associated with at least one latter half fluctuation selection table, the latter half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number), and the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number), and are assigned a predetermined value. However, in the case of a selection table that does not require allocation, the allocation value “0”, that is, the code without allocation, is specified at the beginning.

Then, the gaming control device 100, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), The address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (A4507), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the leading data of the target selection table (the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table, or the first half fluctuation selection table) is not the code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “N”), the target selection table (second half fluctuation) One distribution value first defined in the group table, the second half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table is acquired (A4503).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 subtracts the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number values (the values of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in steps A4303, A4308, and A4314. Then, a new random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (result of A4505 is "N"), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503. Perform the following processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the latter half variation group table, the latter half variation selection table, or the first half variation selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the disturbance determined in the previous step A4505 is acquired. A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the numerical value (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). As a result, at least one second-half fluctuation selection table, second-half fluctuation pattern (second-half fluctuation number), and first-half fluctuation pattern (first-half fluctuation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second-half fluctuation group table, second-half fluctuation selection table, first-half fluctuation selection table). Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number), and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).

When the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (result of A4505 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorted result. (A4507), the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 (A4601). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (A4602), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (A4603). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (A4604), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (A4605).

Then, the game control device 100 adds the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value (A4606), and saves the added value in the special figure game processing timer area (A4607). After that, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (A4608), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared as an effect command (A4609), and effect command setting processing is performed (A4610). ). Next, the special symbol reservation number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (A4611), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is set (A4612). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4613), the vacant area after the shift is cleared (A4614), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a fluctuation pattern determination means capable of determining the fluctuation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed effect contents in the special decoration variable display game. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information about the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern and a stop information command including information about extending stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special drawing command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Public game processing]
Next, details of the universal figure game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure game process. In the general figure game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process relating to the general figure variation display game is controlled, the display of the general figure is set, and the like.

The game control device 100 first executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a (A7601).

Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes the ordinary electric prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring the input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602).

Next, the gaming control device 100, if the universal figure game processing timer is not 0, updates -1 (subtracts only 1) (A7603). The minimum value of the universal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the universal figure game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

When the value of the universal figure game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control device 100 displays the universal figure game processing number. The universal figure game sequence branch table referred to in order to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

Further, the game control device 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the universal figure game process number based on the set universal figure game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call by the universal figure game process number is performed to execute a game branch process corresponding to the universal figure game process number (A7607).

When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control device 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the general figure fluctuation display game, and sets the fluctuation start of the general figure fluctuation display game and the setting of effects, The ordinary figure normal process for setting information necessary for performing the ordinary figure change process is executed (A7608). The details of the ordinary figure ordinary process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the general figure changing process for setting information necessary for performing the general figure displaying process ( A7609). For example, in the processing for changing the figure, in order to shift to the processing for displaying figure, the game processing number is set to "2" and saved in the figure game processing number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, if the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is in the time saving state. The process for displaying a general figure is executed to set the opening time and the information necessary for performing the process for hitting a general figure (A7610). For example, in the processing for displaying a figure, in the case where the result of the figure changing display game is a hit, in order to shift to the processing for hitting a figure, "3" is set as the game processing number and the figure processing number area is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the loss, the game processing number is set to "0" and the game processing number is saved in the general/universal game processing number area in order to shift to the normal/universal processing routine processing.

If the game process number is "3" at step A7607, the game control device 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal hit or to perform the normal electric ball remaining process. The middle processing in the figure is executed (A7611). For example, in the processing for hitting a normal figure, after setting the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined number of times, “4” is set as the game processing number in order to shift to the processing for remaining balls in the ordinary electric power. Save to the universal figure game processing number area.

Further, when the game process number is "4" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal electric ball remaining process for setting information necessary for performing the end-of-universal drawing process (A7612). ). For example, in the normal ball remaining ball process, in order to shift to the general-universal-game end process, "5" is set as the game process number and saved in the general-university game process number area. Save to processing timer area.

Further, when the game process number is "5" in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes the universal figure per end process for setting the information necessary for performing the ordinary process normal process (A7608). (A7613). For example, in the universal figure ending process, "0" is set as the game process number and the game is saved in the universal figure game process number area in order to shift to the regular figure normal process.

After that, the game control device 100 prepares a universal figure variation control table for controlling the variation of the ordinary symbols by the universal figure display 53 (A7614). After that, the symbol variation control process relating to the control of the variation of the ordinary symbol by the universal symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the universal symbol game process is ended.

On the other hand, when the value of the universal figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps.

[Usually processed normally]
Next, details of the ordinary figure ordinary process (A7608) in the ordinary figure game process will be described. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary figure ordinary processing.

The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the number of universal figure reservations is 0 (A7901). When the number of reserved universal figures is 0 (the result of A7901 is "Y"), the routine transfer process 1 of regular figure transfer processing is executed (A7923), and the regular process of normal figures is ended. In the normal figure normal process shift setting process 1, in order to shift to the normal figure normal process, "0" is set as the game process number and saved in the general figure game process number area.

Further, when the number of reserved universal figures is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the game control device 100 loads the random number per random from the random number storage area for regular figures of RWM (for the number of reserved ones), and RWM The random number per symbol is loaded from the per symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A7902). Then, the random number per universal figure storage area (for the number of reservations 1) and the random number storage area per universal figure (for the number of reservations 1) are cleared to 0 (A7903). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that a hit result in the universal figure variation display game is higher than normal is in high probability of regular figure (during high probability state), that is, whether it is in a time saving state (state of universal communication support). It is determined (A7904). Note that the probability of hitting a universal figure in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability of hitting a universal figure in the low probability is 0/251.

When the universal figure high probability is not in progress (the result of A7904 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251) which is the lower limit determination value in the universal figure low probability (A7905). , If the figure high probability is in progress (result of A7904 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the figure high probability is set (A7906), and step A7907 is executed. Move to processing.

The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or higher than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7907). It should be noted that the upper limit judgment value here is common during the high probability of universal figure and during the low probability of regular figure. If the hit random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, if there is no match, the process proceeds to step A7909. When the hit random number is less than the upper limit judgment value (result of A7907 is “N”), it is determined whether the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (A7908).

If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7908 is “Y”), that is, if the hit random number, the game control apparatus 100 saves the deviation information in the hit flag area (A7909). Further, the deviation stop symbol number is set as the universal figure stop symbol number (A7910), and the deviation symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7911), and the process proceeds to step A7915.

If the hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7908 is “N”), that is, if the hit is random, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (A7912), and the hit symbol random number is loaded. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7913), and the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal symbol halt symbol information area (A7914), and the process proceeds to step A7915. There may be several types of hit stop symbols.

Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the normal symbol stop symbol area (A7915), and saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7916). Next, a general figure command corresponding to information related to the general figure fluctuation display game (particularly, hit/miss information of the general figure fluctuation display game) is prepared as an effect command (A7917), and effect command setting processing is executed. (A7918). Then, the random number storage area per universal figure is shifted (A7919), the empty area after the shift is cleared to 0 (A7920), and the number of reserved universal figures is updated by -1 (A7921).

That is, with the execution of the universal figure fluctuation display game for the oldest universal figure hold number 1, the ranks of the universal figure hold numbers 2 to 4 which are on hold after the regular figure hold number 1 are advanced one by one. By this process, the values for the number of reserved figures of 2 in the random number storage area per figure to the number of retained figures of 4 in the random number storage area per general figure are moved from the number of reserved figures of 1 in the random number storage area to 3 for the figure retained Will be done. Then, the value for the figure keeping number 4 in the random number storage area per figure is cleared, and the figure holding number is decremented by one.

Next, the game control device 100 executes processing transition setting processing during normal figure fluctuation (A7922), and ends the normal figure normal processing. In the universal figure changing process transition setting process, in order to shift to the ordinary figure changing process, "1" is set as the game process number and saved in the universal figure game process number area. Save to the game processing timer area.

[Control of production control device]
The control (process) executed by the effect control device 300 by the effect control program will be described below.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, the details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the game machine 10 is powered on. In addition, in the flowchart of the process executed by the performance control device 300, the code (number) of the step is represented as “B***”.

When the execution of the main process is started, effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003) and interrupts are permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, the command reception interrupt process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100 is ready to be executed.

Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

Then, production control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is started by the CPU initial setting (B0002) described above, and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after the lapse of a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

After that, the production control device 300 executes the RTC reading process of reading time information from the RTC (real time clock) 338 (B0009).

In the RTC reading process, the time information may be read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle (eg, every two hours), and it is not necessary to read the time information each time the process moves to step B0009. The RTC reading process may be executed only once when the effect control device 300 is powered on (that is, the gaming machine 10 is powered on) (for example, by changing the position of the RTC reading process, steps B0003 and B0004). May be run between). The production control device 300 sets a time timer (time measuring means) for measuring the time in the timer area in the RAM, and reads the time information from the RTC 338 only once when the time information is read from the RTC 338 at a predetermined cycle or when the power is turned on. When reading the information, the time timer (time measuring means) may be adjusted to match the time of the RTC 338. And production control device 300 may use a timer for time to execute various processes. By doing so, the number of times of processing for reading the time from the RTC 338 can be reduced, and the load on the CPU 311 is reduced.

Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes effect contents (setting) according to the detected signal. Performance button input processing is executed (B0010). Subsequently, a hall/player setting mode process is executed for accepting operations such as changes in the brightness and volume of the LEDs and liquid crystal by the manager of the game hall (game shop) or the player (B0011). In the hall/player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

Next, the production control device 300 executes production point control processing for executing addition and clearing of production points (B0012). In the production point control processing, the production points to be added to the production points by performing the productions and the operations to be added to the production points are performed, and the production points can be carried over to the next game. For example, information including information on effect points is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark). For example, the effect control device 300 can display the QR code (registered trademark) on the display device 41 in the hall/player setting mode process.

Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as effect random numbers (B0013), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check process. (B0014). The details of the received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the production control device 300 executes the customer waiting demo editing process of editing and controlling the contents of the customer waiting demo displayed on the display device 41 (B0015), and saves the power of the gaming machine 10 waiting for the customer. A power saving control process for controlling is executed (B0016).

Next, the effect control device 300 updates various data according to the contents displayed on the display device (display means) such as the display device 41, or sets the drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. Perform effect display edit processing (B0017). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 second (about 33.3 msec). Then, the drawing preparation for the display frame buffer is completed and the drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0018).

Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing (B0019). If it is not the frame switching timing (result of B0019 is “N”), the process of B0019 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached. If it is frame switching timing (result of B0019 is “Y”), the display device 41 is displayed. The screen drawing is instructed (B0020). Since the frame cycle of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when the periodic V blank (image update) is executed twice every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame cycle), the frame switching is performed. .. The image may not be updated in 1/60 seconds, and the interval may be further increased.

The effect control device 300 also executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0021).

The effect control device 300 also executes a decoration control process for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) including LEDs or the like (B0022). In the decoration control process, for example, brightness control (light emission control) of a decoration device such as an LED is executed.

Furthermore, the performance control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling the performance device (board performance device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0023). In the movable body control process, for example, an accessory motion effect for driving a motor is set.

And production control device 300 will return to the processing of B0008, after finishing the processing of B0023 mentioned above. After that, the processing from B0008 to B0023 is repeated.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the details of the received command check processing (B0014) in the above-mentioned main processing (FIG. 23) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the production control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the command reception number is not 0 (B1102). If the number of received commands is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the received command check process is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300, when the command reception number is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After the value is subtracted by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents of the buffer to the command area. Further, even if a new command is received during copying, the data will not be overwritten.

Then, production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (adds 1) (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command read indexes 0 to 31, and here the commands received in the order of index are read and copied to the command area for analysis. It should be noted that at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed, the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the copying of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and when the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N )), the processes of steps B1104 to B1106 are repeated.

When the effect control device 300 receives the command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the received command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the received command buffer, the received command is analyzed separately in the command area for analysis. Then, when the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always allocating a free area in the received command buffer without directly analyzing it, it is possible to prepare for a large number of command reception.

Next, when the copying is completed (result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the content. The processing is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check processing is ended.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process (FIG. 24) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command into the MODE part and the lower byte into the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally continuously transmitted from the MODE section indicating the type of command. It Therefore, the upper part and the lower part of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

Next, production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part is within the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE part indicating the type of command (value assigned as the command specification indicating the type). Then, when the MODE part is within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION part is within the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value is a value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the content of the command (a concrete effect instruction or the like). If the ACTION part is within the normal range (result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that the command of the type specified by the MODE section can take. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), the command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing of B1205 and thereafter.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE part is within the range of the variable system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and there is, for example, a variation command (A3407). Then, when the MODE part represents a variable command (result of B1205 is “Y”), variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent a variable system command (result of B1205 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the big hit system command (B1207). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to effects during a big hit. For example, a fanfare command (A2610) for instructing a fanfare screen or a round screen is commanded. Round command (A2611), an interval command (A2612) for instructing an interval screen, and an ending command (A2612) for instructing an ending screen. If the MODE part indicates a big hit system command (the result of B1207 is "Y"), the big hit system command process is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis process ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the big hit type command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the symbol type command (B1209). Note that the symbol-based commands include, for example, a decorative special figure command (A3403, A3503) corresponding to a stop symbol pattern. Then, when the MODE part represents a symbol type command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol type command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the symbol type command (result of B1209 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part is within the range of the one-shot type command (B1211). Then, when the MODE part indicates a single-shot system command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command process is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent a one-shot system command (the result of B1211 is “N”), then the MODE part determines whether or not it is within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (B1213). .. The read-ahead symbol system command includes, for example, a read-ahead stop symbol command (A2913). Then, when the MODE part indicates the prefetching symbol type command (the result of B1213 is "Y"), the prefetching symbol type command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is ended.

Production control device 300, if the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead symbol system command (the result of B1213 is "N"), then the MODE part determines whether or not the range of the look-ahead variable system command (B1215). ). The look-ahead variation system command includes, for example, a look-ahead variation pattern command (A2913). When the MODE part indicates the prefetching variable system command (result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetching variable system command process is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is ended.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 may receive an unexpected command (for example, a command to be used only in the test mode) when the MODE part does not represent the look-ahead variable system command (the result of B1215 is “N”). Therefore, the received command analysis processing ends. Also, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), the ACTION part is not in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is "N"), the received command analysis processing ends.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the procedure of single-shot system command processing executed by effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1301). If the MODE part indicates a model designation command (result of B1301 is “Y”), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1302), and the single-shot command processing is terminated.

When the MODE part does not represent the model designation command (result of B1301 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a RAM initialization command (B1303). ). If the MODE part indicates a RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “Y”), RAM initialization setting processing for notifying RAM initialization is executed (B1304), and single-shot system command processing is executed. finish.

When the MODE section does not represent the RAM initialization command (result of B1303 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE section represents a power failure recovery command (B1305). ). If the MODE part indicates a power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is "Y"), power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1306), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the power failure recovery command (result of B1305 is “N”), production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a customer waiting demo command (B1307). .. When the MODE part indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is "Y"), the customer waiting demo setting processing is executed (B1308), and the single-shot system command processing ends.

When the MODE part does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1307 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command. (B1309). If the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (result of B1309 is "Y"), the special figure 1 reservation information setting process is executed (B1310), and the single-shot system command process is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1309 is “N”), then the production control device 300 determines whether the MODE part represents the decoration special figure 2 hold number command. It is determined (B1311). When the MODE part indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1311 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation information setting processing is executed (B1312), and the single-shot system command processing is ended.

If the MODE part does not represent the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (result of B1311 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a probability information command. (B1313). If the MODE part indicates the probability information command (result of B1313 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1314), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the probability information command (result of B1313 is “N”), production control device 300 then determines whether or not the MODE part represents an error/illegal command ( B1315). The error/illegal commands include, for example, a fraud command, a fraud cancellation command, a state off command, and a state on command. As a state-on command, a signal is generated from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 (glass frame opening error) and a signal is generated from the front frame opening detection switch 64 (body frame opening detection switch) (body frame opening error, front frame opening error). There is a command indicating a release error). The status off command indicates that no error has occurred.

If the MODE part represents an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “Y”), error/illegal setting processing for notifying or canceling the error or fraud is executed (B1316), Terminates single-shot command processing.

When the MODE section does not represent an error/illegal command (result of B1315 is “N”), the MODE control section 300 next causes the MODE section to execute a command for production mode switching (special figure display processing). Etc.) is determined (B1317). Then, when the MODE part indicates a command for effect mode switching (result of B1317 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1318), and the single shot system command processing ends.

If the MODE part does not represent the command for mode switching (result of B1317 is "N"), the production control device 300 next indicates whether the MODE part represents an out ball number command indicating the out ball number. It is determined whether or not (B1319). If the MODE part indicates the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “Y”), the out-ball number receiving process is executed (B1320), and the single shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the out-ball number command (result of B1319 is “N”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE part represents a count command (special winning opening count command). It is determined (B1321). Then, when the MODE section indicates the command for counting the special winning opening switch (the result of B1321 is “Y”), the count information setting process is executed (B1322), and the single shot system command process is ended.

When the MODE part does not represent the count command (result of B1321 is “N”), performance control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a set value information command (probability set value information command). (B1323). The set value information command is included in the command at the time of power recovery from step A1046 and the command at the time of RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1044 in FIG. 6B. When the MODE part indicates the set value information command (result of B1323 is “Y”), the set value receiving process is executed (B1324), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the set value reception process, the set value (probability set value) is stored in a storage unit such as a RAM and necessary processing is executed.

When the MODE section does not represent the setting value information command (result of B1323 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section represents a setting change command (B1325). As the setting change type command, for example, there is a command (A1030) during the probability setting change. If the MODE part indicates a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “Y”), the setting change type information setting process is executed (B1326), and the one-shot type command process is ended. In the setting change type information setting process, the contents of the setting change type command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for changing the probability setting is received, the setting change system information setting process displays a setting change display for notifying the player that the setting is being changed on the display device 41.

If the MODE part does not represent a setting change type command (result of B1325 is “N”), production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part represents a setting confirmation type command (B1327). .. As a command for setting confirmation, for example, there is a command (A1033) during confirmation of probability setting. Then, when the MODE part represents a setting confirmation system command (result of B1327 is “Y”), the setting confirmation system information setting process is executed (B1328), and the single-shot system command process is ended. In the setting confirmation system information setting process, the contents of the setting confirmation system command are stored and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the command for confirming the probability setting is received, the setting confirmation system information setting process displays a setting confirmation display for informing the player that the setting is being confirmed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the MODE part represents a symbol stop command (B1329). The command to stop the symbols includes, for example, the symbol stop command of special figure 1 (decorative special figure 1 stop command) and the symbol stop command of special figure 2 (decorative special figure 2 stop command). Then, when the MODE part represents the command of the symbol stop (the result of B1329 is “Y”), the production control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE part is a normal command ( B1330).

When the command of the MODE part is a normal command (the result of B1330 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1331), and after all the symbols stop the game. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1332), and the single-shot system command processing ends. In the process of B1332, as an example, the game state flag is set to the normal state, but the game state flag is set to a "changing", "big hit" or "small hit" flag depending on the timing at which this process is executed. Is set.

On the other hand, if the MODE part does not represent a command to stop the symbol (result of B1329 is “N”), or if the command of the MODE part is not normal (result of B1330 is “N”), the effect control device 300 terminates the single-shot command processing.

In addition, the production control device 300 may execute processing for commands not shown in FIG.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the symbol-based command processing (B1210) in the received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol-based command processing executed by the production control device 300.

The production control device 300 sets the special figure type corresponding to the MODE part of the received symbol system command (decorative special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1801). The special map type is special map 1 or special map 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1802). Here, in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, since the distribution ratio of the symbols changes, the symbol type is set using the table for each MODE. In the present embodiment, the symbol type is a deviating symbol, a 4R probability variation big hit symbol (4R-A1, symbol 1), a 4R normal jackpot symbol (4R-A2, symbol 2), an 8R probability variation jackpot symbol (8R-A1, Design 3), 8R normal big hit design (8R-A2, design 4), 12R probability variation big hit design (12R-A1, design 5), 12R normal big hit design (12R-A2, design 6) it corresponds.

[Variable command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing (FIG. 25) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

The production control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received variation system command (variation command) is undetermined (B1901). When the special figure type is not determined (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1901 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1902), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent or not. Is determined (B1903). Here, the inconsistency is a contradiction in performing an effect, such as when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received although an outlying variable system command is received. When the variable type command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B1903 is “Y”), the variable type command processing is ended.

When the variation type command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1903 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation type command (fluctuation command) (B1904), and the effect is changing. A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1905). It should be noted that there are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, the special state is being changed in the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1906), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1907).

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, the details of the variation effect setting process (B1905) in the variation system command process (FIG. 28) described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a variation without reach (variation that does not reach the reach state) (B2001). When the fluctuation pattern type is fluctuation without reach (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the first half notice distribution group corresponding to the number of effect points, model code, special figure type, effect mode, and setting information (setting value) The address table is set (B2002), and the MODE part of the variable system command (fluctuation command) and the address of the first-half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of pending types of special figure classification are acquired (B2003). In the case of the fluctuation without reach, the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, and therefore the address of the table corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

If the variation pattern type is not the reachless variation (the result of B2001 is “N”), that is, if the reachable variation, the production control device 300, the number of production points, the model code, the special figure type, the production mode, The first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the symbol type and the setting information (setting value) is set (B2004), and the MODE part of the variable system command (variation command) and the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are set. The address is acquired (B2005).

After the steps B2003 and B2005, the effect control device 300 performs the lottery of the notice that appears during the first half fluctuation (before the reach) (B2006). Next, the latter half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the number of production points, model code, special figure type, production mode, symbol type, and setting information (setting value) is set (B2007), and the ACT of the variable system command is set. The address of the latter half notice distribution group table corresponding to the division is obtained (B2008), and the notice lottery that appears during the second half change (during reach) is performed (B2009). After that, the contents of the variation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the variation system command (variation command) are determined (B2010). In addition, the variation time and main reach contents can be known from the variation system command.

Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the announcement lottery (B2011). After that, the stop symbol of the decorative special figure variable display game is determined according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect and the notice effect (B2012). Here, the decorative stop design is specifically determined, such as determining the separation in the case of the outlying design.

Next, the effect control device 300 performs the display setting of the variable effect (B2013) and the display setting of the notice effect (B2014). Then, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and, for example, the display of decreasing the hold display corresponding to the decorative special figure that changes this time is set (B2015). Next, a voice number that determines the effect mode (sound output mode) by the sound of the speaker and a decoration number that determines the effect mode by the light emission of the decoration device are set (B2016). The decorating device (board decorating device 46, frame decorating device 18) has a plurality of decorative light emitting portions (decorative LEDs, etc.), and emits light in a light emitting mode (color of each LED, light emitting timing, etc.) determined by a decoration number. ..

It is also possible to set the voice number and the decoration number based on the setting information (setting value) as well as the effect contents. In this way, the player can enjoy inferring the setting information (setting value) of the gaming machine 10 from the light emitting mode of the decoration device, that is, the light emitting mode of the decorative light emitting unit (LED).

Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B2017), and the fourth special symbol other than the above-mentioned first to third special symbols varying on the display device 41. The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (4th symbol, identification information) is performed (B2018). The fourth symbol variation may be displayed on the lamp display units 1 and 2 (LED) of the above-described lamp display device 80 provided in addition to the display device 41, or may be executed on the display screen of the display device 41. Good.

[Execution mode of notice production and big hit expectation]
FIG. 30 illustrates an execution mode of the notice effect and the degree of expectation of the big hit (special result). In the present embodiment, the notice effect is an effect capable of giving an advance notice of the result of the special figure variation display game, and suggests the expectation degree (probability) of a big hit.

FIG. 30 is a table diagram showing an example of the degree of expectation of a big hit for the execution mode of each notice effect.

The effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect and the second notice effect performed after the first notice effect as the notice effect. The first notice effect is set to be executed, for example, in the first half variation which is the variation from the start of the variable display game (special figure variation display game, decorative special figure variation display game) to the reach state. It is a notice. The dialogue announcement during the first half change is selected in step B2006 of the change effect setting process described above. The second notice production is, for example, a cut-in notice that is set to be executed in the latter half variation which is the variation from the reach state to the end of the special figure variation display game. The cut-in notice during the second half change is selected in step B2009 of the change effect setting process described above. Note that, for example, the form of presentation may be changed, and a cut-in notice may be given as the first notice effect, or a dialogue notice may be given as the second notice effect. In addition, the effect modes of the first notice effect and the second notice effect are not limited to the cut-in notice and the dialogue notice, and various effect modes such as character appearance notice, group notice, button operation promotion effect, and light emission of decorative members and the like. Can be applied.

At that time, the effect control device 300 can change the degree of expectation (reliability) at which the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit according to the execution mode of the first notice effect and the second notice effect. The expectation level of the notice effect indicates the probability of a big hit when the notice effect is selected, and the selection rate of the notice effect when it is a big hit and the notice effect when it is not a big hit (when it is off) It can be calculated based on the selection rate and the like. In this way, by suggesting the degree of expectation to the player in the notice production, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit, and to increase the interest of the game. Further, the expectation level is set as a percentage (0 to 100%) for each notice effect, and the notice effect having an expectation level of 100% can greatly enhance the player's expectation as a big hit confirmation effect. The expectation level may be set to a value other than percentage for each notice effect, or may be set as a relative value in each notice effect as described later.

The degree of expectation in the first notice effect (for example, the notice of dialogue) is 15% when the color of the balloon is green as the first identification mode, and 30% when the color of the balloon is red as the second identification mode. is there. It should be noted that, although not illustrated, the third and later identification modes that display a color with higher expectations may be set. In this way, the color of the balloon can be changed according to the degree of expectation, for example, from white with a low degree of expectation to blue, green, red, gold, or a rainbow (cherry blossom) with a high degree of expectation.

In addition, the degree of expectation in the second notice effect (for example, cut-in notice) is 30% in the case of the first identification mode (for example, green) and 50% in the case of the second identification mode (for example, red).

Therefore, for example, when the notice of the second identification mode (red) is continuously executed by the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, the notice of words) is 30%, and the second notice is performed. The effect (for example, cut-in notice) is 50%, which means that the expectation of the second notice effect executed later is higher than that of the first notice effect executed first. Therefore, the player can increase the expectation of the big hit from the expectation of the second notice effect by visually recognizing the notice effect (the second notice effect) in the latter half of the expectation (the high expectation priority). ). Note that when the second-half notice effect occurs, the expectation degree of the second-half notice effect can be prioritized and used over the expectation degree of the first-half notice effect (second-half notice effect priority). By giving priority to the second half notice production, regardless of whether or not the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes a big hit, it becomes easy to execute a production with a high sense of expectation in the first half notice production, and the game can be played. The interest can be increased.

On the other hand, for example, in the case where the notice of the first identification mode (green) is continuously executed by the first notice effect and the second notice effect, the first notice effect (for example, the notice of the dialogue) is 15%, and the second notice effect is 15%. In the notice effect (for example, cut-in notice), the anticipation degree of the first notice effect executed earlier is higher than that of the second notice effect executed later, which is reversed to 5%. Therefore, the expectation level for the first-half notice effect (first notice effect) is higher than the expectation degree for the latter-half notice effect (second notice effect), and thus the player who has recognized that the expectation degree is high by the first-half notice effect. It is easy to increase the expectation of (high priority is given priority). Therefore, it is easy to increase the player's expectation in both the first-half notice effect and the second-half notice effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

For example, when a rainbow-colored balloon that is a big hit confirmation effect is generated in the first notice effect, the color of the balloon in the second notice effect is changed to rainbow color or cherry blossom color to further fuel the player's expectation. May be. Further, by canceling (skipping) the second notice effect and immediately displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game, it may be possible for the player to recognize early that the big hit has occurred. ..

Further, the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be any mode in which the notice effect in the latter half (second notice effect) is performed after the notice effect in the first half (first notice effect), and the look-ahead notice or the pseudo continuous effect is performed. , May be applied to continuous notice (announcement of chance eyes), step-up notice, etc. For example, the effect control device 300 can execute the first notice effect using the hold display as the look-ahead notice, and then execute the second notice effect when the hold related to the hold display is exhausted. The pre-reading notice can be set in the pre-reading symbol type command processing (B1214) and the pre-reading variable type command processing (B1216). Moreover, the effect control device 300 may execute the second notice effect after the first notice effect after performing the first notice effect before the temporary stop or the like in the pseudo continuous variation. The effect control device 300 performs the first notice effect in the first step (first stage, first time) of the continuous notice or the step-up notice, and then executes the second notice effect after the first notice effect. You can

The step-up notice is an effect in which single effects (sub-effects) set in a plurality of stages are sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (predetermined step). The continuous notice (notice of chance eyes) is an effect of displaying a decorative special symbol that is out of common in a plurality of variable display games. The pseudo continuous effect will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

[Specific example of identification mode of first notice effect]
FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the identification mode of the first notice effect (serif notice), and is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the display device 41.

FIG. 31A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red).

In the upper center of the screen of the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of variable display areas 610 (left area 610a, right area 610b, middle) in which a large decorative special pattern (large pattern, decorative first pattern A to C) is enlarged and displayed. Area 610c) is located. The decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are displayed in a variable display “↓↓↓”.

At the bottom of the display screen of the display device 41, a first hold display section 630a, a second hold display section 630b, and a hold exhaustion area 640 are arranged.

On the first hold display unit 630a, a hold display (start memory display, stock hold) corresponding to the first start memory (special figure 1 start winning memory) is displayed. For example, in the first hold display section 630a of FIG. 31A, one hold display 633a related to the variable display game before execution is displayed. When the next variable display game starts, the hold display 633a of the first hold display unit 630a moves to the display position of the hold display on the right side, that is, moves from the first hold display unit 630a to the hold exhaustion area 640 and changes. Displayed as a medium hold display (hold shift).

On the second hold display portion 630b, a hold display (start memory display) corresponding to the second start memory (special figure 2 start winning memory) is displayed. For example, the second hold display unit 630b at the present time (FIG. 31A) does not have a hold display corresponding to the second start storage. In addition, the hold display displayed on the second hold display unit 630b is put on hold shift in preference to the hold display on the first hold display unit 630a when the next variable display game starts, and moves to the hold exhaustion area 640. To do.

A pending display during change is displayed in the pending digest area 640. On the first hold display section 630a and the second hold display section 630b, a start memory display corresponding to the start memory relating to the variable display game before execution is displayed, while in the hold exhaustion area 640, a running memory is being executed. A starting memory display (a changing pending display, a running pending display) corresponding to the starting memory for the variable display game is displayed. For example, since the variable display game is currently being executed (FIG. 31(A)), the variable pending display corresponding to the variable display game is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

At the right end of the display screen of the display device 41, a special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 and a special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 are arranged. The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 displays the number "1" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number, and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 displays the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. There is.

Then, when the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect, the dialogue notice 724 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. For example, the dialogue notice 724 is a notice production made up of a character and a balloon in which the dialogue "Chance is!" of the character is displayed, and is executed during the first half change before the reach is established.

As shown in FIG. 31(A), when the speech of the dialog advance notice 724 is green (first identification mode), the expectation in the first advance notice effect is 15%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31(B), when the speech balloon 724 has a red balloon (second identification mode), the expectation level in the first trailer effect is 30%.

[Specific example of second notice production identification mode]
Next, FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect (cut-in notice), and is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen of the display device 41.

32A is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the second notice effect is performed in the first identification mode (for example, green) during the variable display game, and FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device 41 when the second notice effect is performed in the second identification mode (for example, red). Note that in the following screen transition diagram, description of the same contents as in FIG. 31 will be appropriately omitted.

When the effect control device 300 executes the second notice effect, the cut-in notice 725 is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. For example, the cut-in notice 725 is a notice production made up of a character, a balloon in which the line of the character “preemption!!” is displayed, and a cut-in frame surrounding them, and during the second half change after the reach is established. Executed. In the second half change, the decoration first symbols A to C in the change display area 610 are in the reach state “5↓5”, and the second notice effect (cut-in notice) is executed in association with the reach effect. Become.

As shown in FIG. 32A, when the balloon of the cut-in notice 725 is green (first identification mode), the degree of expectation in the second notice effect is 5%.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32B, when the balloon of the cut-in notice 725 is red (second identification mode), the degree of expectation in the second notice effect is 50%.

In addition, in the dialog advance notice and the cut-in advance notice shown in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32, the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation is not limited to the change of the color of the speech balloon, and the color of the character or the dialogue may be changed, and the sound or voice may be used. The notification may be changed. In addition, these shapes and patterns may be changed to suggest the degree of expectation, for example, the effect control device 300 may change the shape of the balloon to a cloud shape or a spark shape to suggest the degree of expectation. Further, when the character or the dialogue is changed as a mode for suggesting the expectation, a balloon of a color corresponding to the character or the dialogue may be displayed.

[Screen transition diagram of display screen of display device when notice production is executed]
33A and 33B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series, and are examples of screen transitions when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

FIG. 33A(A) is a display screen of the display device 41 immediately before the variable display game is executed. The decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed as the symbol “357”, and the pending shift-changed pending display is displayed in the pending digestion area 640.

FIG. 33A(B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The decorative first patterns A to C are in the state of variable display “↓↓↓”.

FIG. 33A(C) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect according to the second identification mode is executed while the variable display game is being executed. For example, when the first notice effect (serif notice) is executed in the first half variation, the dialogue notice 724 with a red balloon (second identification mode) is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 33A(C). "Chance!" is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 30%.

FIG. 33A(D) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game being executed is in the reach state in the second half variation, and FIGS. 33A(E) to 33B(H) show the reach state. 8 is a display screen when the reach effect is being performed. The decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are in the reach state with the symbol “5↓5” as shown in FIG. 33A(D).

When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 33A(E), a reach effect display 726 of "defeat the enemy tiger!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen. Subsequently, the reach effect display 726 displayed in the center of the display screen is switched to a mode in which it battles with an enemy tiger, as shown in FIGS. 33A(F) to 33B(H).

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) according to the second identification mode is executed during the reach effect, the balloon on the display screen of the display device 41 is red (second) as shown in FIG. 33B(G). A cut-in notice 725 “identification mode” “preemptive!!” is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 50%.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 33B (H), a reach effect display 726 in which the own tiger (tiger on the player's side) defeats the enemy tiger and wins by battle in the reach effect is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 33B(I), the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed as a symbol "555", and the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit result mode (special result mode). ), the fanfare production and the big hit game (special game) are sequentially started (not shown).

[Screen transition diagram of display screen of display device when notice production is executed]
33C and 33D are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 in time series, and are other examples of screen transitions when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game.

FIGS. 33C(A) and 33C(B) are similar to FIGS. 33A(A) and 33A(B) described above. As shown in FIGS. 33C(A) and 33C(B), the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610, which are stopped and displayed with the symbol "357", have the variable display "↓↓↓". It becomes a state.

FIG. 33C(C′) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the first notice effect according to the first identification mode is executed while the variable display game is being executed. For example, when the first notice effect (serif notice) is executed in the first-half variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 33C(C′), the display screen of the display device 41 has a green speech bubble (first identification mode). A notice 724 “Chance!” is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 15%.

FIGS. 33C(D) to 33C(F) are views similar to FIGS. 33A(D) to 33A(F) described above. The decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are in the reach state with the symbol “5↓5”, and the reach effect display 726 is switched to a mode in which the own tiger and the enemy tiger battle by the reach effect.

Then, when the second notice effect (cut-in notice) according to the first identification mode is executed during the reach effect, the display screen of the display device 41 displays a green balloon (the first one) as shown in FIG. 33D (G′). The cut-in notice 725 “1 identification mode” “preemptive!!” is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 5%. Therefore, the expectation level (15%) of the dialogue notice 724 (first notice effect) displayed first is higher than the expectation degree (5%) of the cut-in notice 725 (second notice effect) displayed later. Since it also becomes higher, it is possible to expect with respect to not only the second half notice effect (the second notice effect) but also the first half notice effect (the first notice effect). Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to both of the notice effects, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

FIGS. 33D(H) and 33D(I) are similar to FIGS. 33B(H) and 33B(I) described above. As shown in FIGS. 33D(H) and 33D(I), the reach effect display 726 to win the battle is displayed, and the decorative first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed as the symbol “555”. By doing so, the stop result mode of the variable display game becomes the big hit result mode (special result mode). Then, the fanfare production and the big hit game (special game) are sequentially started (not shown).

[Modification of screen transition diagram of display screen of display device when notice production is executed]
FIG. 34 is a screen transition diagram showing the display screen of the display device 41 in time series, which is a modified example of the screen transition when the notice effect is executed during the variable display game. In the modified example of the screen transition diagram, a specific example of the identification mode of the second notice effect (cut-in notice) will be described. In this modification, both the first notice effect and the second notice effect may be performed during the second half change after the reach is established.

FIG. 34(G′) shows a case where the second notice effect (cut-in notice) and the first notice effect (serif notice) are executed during the reach effect after the reach state is obtained in FIG. 33A(F). 6 is a display screen of the display device 41.

After the cut-in notice 725 with the green balloon is displayed by the second notice production, "It is a preemptive!!", and it is suggested that the degree of expectation is 5%, after the cut-in notice 725, the first notice production is performed. The speech notice 724 with a red speech bubble “Chance is!” is overlaid, suggesting that the degree of expectation is 30%.

Then, after the battle production in which the enemy tiger attacks on a first-come-first-served basis (not shown), as shown in FIG. 34(H'), the reverse production in which the own tiger defeats the enemy tiger at the counter and wins is the reach production. Performed as display 726. As described above, when the expectation level of the first notice effect is higher than the expectation degree of the second notice effect, the first notice effect is overlapped and displayed immediately after the second notice effect, so that the player is interested. Since the range of effects of the reach effect display 726 can be widened like holding, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In the case of the modified example of the screen transition, the first notice effect in the first-half change is skipped (the screen transitions from FIG. 33A(B) to FIG. 33A(D) by skipping FIG. 33A(C). ). FIG. 34(I) after that is a diagram similar to FIG. 33A, in which the decoration first symbols A to C in the variable display area 610 are stopped and displayed with the symbol “555”, and the stop result mode of the variable display game is a big hit. It becomes a result mode (special result mode).

[Modified Example of Table Diagram Explaining Expectation Level of Big Hit for Execution Mode of Each Notice Production]
FIG. 35 is a modification of the table diagram illustrating points related to the degree of expectation of a big hit with respect to the execution mode of each notice effect. The points here can be used as the above-mentioned effect points, but may not be used as the effect points.

As shown in FIG. 35, the point (value, predetermined value) in the first notice effect (for example, the notice of dialogue) of the modified example is 15 p (point) in the case of the first identification mode (green), and the second identification mode. It is 30p in the case of (red) and 1p in the case of the third identification mode (black). As described above, in the modified example of this table, in addition to the first identification mode and the second identification mode, for example, a low point (1p) black color is set as the color of the balloon as the third identification mode. The value of the points may be changed as appropriate, and the identification modes after the fourth identification mode and the preview effects after the third preview effect may be appropriately added.

Here, points are assigned to each notice effect such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect. The notice effect that is executed multiple times, such as the first notice effect and the second notice effect, so that the integrated value obtained by accumulating the points of the notice effect that is executed multiple times changes according to the degree of expectation (reliability) that is a big hit. And the point of the notice production is set. In addition, the point of the notice effect may be set as a point having a negative value such that the integrated value decreases.

In addition, the expectation degree in the second notice production (for example, cut-in notice) of the modified example is 5p in the first identification mode (green), 50p in the second identification mode (red), and the third. It is 1p in the case of the identification mode (black). As described above, in any of the notice effects, when the third identification mode is selected, the degree of expectation becomes low (1p).

Therefore, for example, when the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect (15p) of the first identification mode (green) and then executes the second notice effect (50p) of the second identification mode (red). , The integrated value of points becomes 65p. Further, for example, when the first notice effect (1p) and the second notice effect (1p) in the third identification mode (black) are executed, the integrated value of points becomes 2p.

The notice effect that is executed by the effect control device 300 a plurality of times and the points of the notice effect are set such that the larger the integrated value of the points, the higher the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, when the first notice effect (30p) and the second notice effect (50p) of the second identification mode (red) are executed, the integrated value of points becomes 80p, which is the maximum in the combination in the table of FIG. Become. Therefore, the player can recognize that the expectation of the big hit is high, and the expectation can be increased, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Also, since the integrated value of the points of the notice effect that is executed a plurality of times changes according to the expectation of the big hit, it is possible to make the player's interest also in the notice effect of the first half (first notice effect). It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Timing chart when notice production is applied to pseudo continuous production]
FIG. 36 is an example of a timing chart when the notice effect is applied to the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect).

Here, the pseudo continuous effect is to simulate the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) that is variably displayed, from the start to the end of one variation display game (special figure variation display game). This is an effect in which a pseudo change (single effect, sub effect, sub change) that temporarily displays a temporary stop (pseudo stop display) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times. In addition, at the time of the pseudo stop display, the pseudo continuous symbol suggesting the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect is that, during the period from the start to the end of one variation display game, the variation special display is not temporarily stopped in a pseudo manner, and the pseudo variation is continuously performed a predetermined number of times ( It may be an effect that makes it appear as if it is being executed multiple times. At that time, the effect control device 300 displays a display such as "NEXT" on the display screen of the display device 41 even if the temporary stop display is not performed, so that the effect is changed to the next pseudo variation. Can be executed.

For example, in the variable display game started in FIG. 36(A) or FIG. 36(B), a pseudo continuous effect including pseudo fluctuations is performed a predetermined number of times (3 times). The pseudo continuous effect and the predetermined number of pseudo fluctuations may be determined in step B2010 of the fluctuation effect setting process (FIG. 29), for example.

In the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 36(A), the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect at the first and second pseudo changes (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect, and at the time of the third pseudo change. The first to third notice effects are executed. For example, the first notice effect is a dialogue notice, the second notice effect is a cut-in notice, and the third notice effect is an effect notice in which an effect effect is added around the balloon or the like. The pseudo variation execution time is set to the same time for the first and second pseudo variations, and is set to a time longer for the third pseudo variation than the first and second pseudo variations.

Here, in the first notice effect (serif notice) that is executed at the first and second pseudo changes of the pseudo continuous effect, the speech balloon that is the background of the dialogue is white (for example, expectation 1 %), and is set to blue (for example, the degree of expectation is 10%) in the second pseudo variation. In addition, in the third pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect, the color is set to blue or higher (for example, expectation level of 10% or higher).

At that time, the content of the serif notice (serif, character emitting the serif, shape of the speech balloon, pattern, etc.) other than the mode (color of the speech balloon) indicating the degree of expectation should be the same for the first to third pseudo variations. It is set and the first notice effect is executed. Therefore, the player visually recognizes the advance notice effect of the same content as the pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, but the mode (color of the balloon) suggesting the expectation degree is changed and the expectation degree of the jackpot is increased. Since it is possible to recognize that, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

On the other hand, in the third pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect, the second and third notice effects (cut-in notice and effect notice) are executed together with the first notice effect (serif notice with a speech bubble of blue or more). After that, for example, the reach state (for example, “5↓5”) is obtained by the third pseudo variation, and the reach effect can be developed.

In the pseudo continuous effect, the effect control device 300 sets the second pseudo fluctuation so as to be longer than the first pseudo fluctuation, as shown in FIG. The first notice effect and the second notice effect may be executed.

In the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 36(B), the effect control device 300 executes the first notice effect at the first pseudo change (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect, and at the second pseudo change at the second pseudo change. The first and second notice effects are executed, and the first to third notice effects are executed at the time of the third pseudo variation.

Here, in the first notice effect (serif notice) executed during the first to third pseudo changes of the pseudo continuous effect, the speech bubble that is the background of the dialogue is white (for example, the degree of expectation of 1 in the first pseudo change). %), the second pseudo variation is set to blue (for example, the expected degree 10%), and the third pseudo variation is set to be blue or more (for example, the expected degree 10% or more).

The first notice effect performed in the second and third pseudo changes is set to have the same content as that of the first notice effect performed in the first pseudo change, except for a mode suggesting the degree of expectation. In addition, the contents of the second notice effect performed in the third pseudo variation are set to be the same as those in the second notice effect performed in the second pseudo variation, except for a mode suggesting the degree of expectation.

As described above, the effect control device 300 is also executed in the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 36(B) similarly to FIG. 36(A), after changing the mode in which the expectation degree of a big hit is suggested. The same effect as the notice effect in the pseudo variation is also executed in the notice effect in the pseudo variation executed later. Therefore, according to such an aspect, the player performs an effect including the notice effect that has already been executed each time the pseudo variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, and also indicates the expectation degree (color of the balloon). It can be recognized that the expectation of the jackpot is increasing due to the change of, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

Even in a step-up notice that is a production in which a single production (sub-production) set in a plurality of stages is sequentially executed from a lower stage (step) to a predetermined stage (step), a production including a previously-produced notice production is included. May be performed each time, and the mode of suggesting the degree of expectation may be changed. The pseudo continuous effect and the step-up notice are composed of a plurality of continuous single effects, and the larger the plurality of times, the greater the expectation of a big hit.

[Operation/Effect of First Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game, a special figure variable display game), and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the game ( With the effect control device 300), a special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the game is a special result (big hit). The effect control means performs a notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation (reliability) of the game stop result being a special result, the first notice effect (for example, a notice of a dialogue) and the second notice effect executed after the first notice effect. A noticeable effect (for example, a cut-in notice) can be executed, and a first identification mode (for example, a balloon is green) or a first noticeable effect execution mode and a second noticeable effect execution mode, or A second identification mode (for example, a balloon having a red color) having a higher degree of expectation than the first identification mode can be selected, and an expectation level when the second notice effect is executed in the second identification mode is set as a first notice. When the effect is set to be higher than the expectation when executing in the second identification mode, and when the second notice effect is executed in the first identification mode, the expectation is set when executing the first notice effect in the first identification mode. Set lower than expectations.

According to such a gaming machine 10, it is easy to increase the player's expectation in both the first-half notice effect and the second-half notice effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is a pseudo variable effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game is the special result in one variable display game. It is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous) in which (pseudo-variation, single effect) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), and a special result is generated in at least two pseudo-variation effects of the pseudo-variable effect performed a predetermined number of times. The effect having the same content as the pseudo variation effect that is executed first after changing the mode that suggests the expectation degree is also executed in the pseudo variation effect that is executed later.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the player performs an effect including the notice effect that has already been executed each time the pseudo-variation of the pseudo continuous effect progresses, and suggests the expectation level (for example, the color of the balloon). ) Can be recognized and the expectation of a big hit is increasing, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) produces a special result in at least two pseudo variable effects that are successively performed among the pseudo variable effects that are performed a predetermined number of times. The effect having the same content as the pseudo-variation effect that is executed first after changing the mode that indicates the degree of expectation is also executed in the pseudo-variation effect that is executed immediately after. According to such a gaming machine 10, the mode (for example, the color of the balloon) that indicates the degree of expectation changes in the pseudo fluctuation of the pseudo variable effect that is continuously performed, so the player recognizes the mode of the change. It becomes easier and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) performs at least the first and second pseudo-variable effects (pseudo-variation, single-effect) among the pseudo-variable effects performed a predetermined number of times. The effect having the same content as the pseudo variation effect executed the first time after changing the mode in which the degree of expectation of the special result is suggested is executed also in the pseudo variation effect executed the second time. According to the gaming machine 10 as described above, in the first and second pseudo-variations of the pseudo-variation effect, the mode indicating the degree of expectation (for example, the color of the balloon) changes. Therefore, the mode of the change is similarly changed by the player. Can be easily recognized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can execute the notice effects (the first notice effect and the second notice effect) to which the predetermined values (points) are respectively assigned, a plurality of times. Therefore, the notice effect to be executed a plurality of times is set such that the integrated value obtained by accumulating the predetermined values of the notice effects to be executed a plurality of times changes in accordance with the degree of expectation that the game stop result will be the special result.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the integrated value of the points of the notice effect executed a plurality of times changes according to the expectation of the big hit, the interest of the player is changed to the notice effect in the first half (first notice effect). You will be able to hold it against you, and you can enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 43. The configuration other than that described below may be the same as that of the first embodiment. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations that perform the same functions as those of the first embodiment, and redundant description will be appropriately omitted.

[Timing chart when executing suggestive performance]
FIG. 37 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

First, in the suggestion effect according to the second embodiment, the timing of the first pattern effect will be described. When the effect display device 300 executes the first pattern effect while the variable display game is being executed, the suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41.

Here, the suggestive effect is an effect that suggests that a predetermined notice effect may be executed. The suggestive effect (authenticity) in the first pattern effect functions as an authentic pattern effect in which a predetermined notice effect is subsequently performed. On the other hand, the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect, which will be described later, functions as a gasse pattern effect without a predetermined notice effect being performed thereafter. The effect control device 300 is not limited to the display screen of the display device 41, and may perform the suggestive effect by the light emitting effect of the decoration devices 18a and 18b. The suggestive effect (genuine) may be called the first suggestive effect, and the suggestive effect (gase) may be called the second suggestive effect.

Subsequently, after the completion of the suggested effect (authenticity) in the first pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the notice effect that gives advance notice of the predetermined content as the notice effect (predetermined notice effect) according to the second embodiment. To do. The notice effect is an effect that can give an advance notice of the result of the special map variation display game, and may be an indication of the expectation (potential) of a big hit, but is not limited to this and gives an announcement that a particular effect is executed. You can do it.

Next, in the suggestion effect according to the second embodiment, the timing of the second pattern effect will be described. When the effect control device 300 executes the second pattern effect, the suggestion effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41. As described above, the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect is a gaze pattern effect that is not followed by the notice effect.

The suggestion effect (authentic) in the first pattern effect is set to be shorter in execution time than the suggestion effect (gase) in the second pattern effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the production time (the total production time of the suggestion production and the notice production) when the suggestion production (authenticity) in the first pattern production and the subsequent notice production are executed from being delayed. The interest of the game can be improved. Further, the suggestive effect (genuine) in the first pattern effect ends relatively early compared to the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect, and the player can more easily pay attention to the notice effect to be executed thereafter, so that the game The interest of can be improved. Note that the start timings at which the suggestive effect (genuine) and the suggestive effect (gase) start may be the same.

Further, the change time when the suggestive effect (authentic) of the first pattern effect and the notice effect are performed is longer than the change time when the suggestive effect (gase) of the second pattern effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to secure the time for performing the notice effect in the first pattern effect, which has a relatively high expectation (reliability) for the big hit compared to the second pattern effect, so that the notice effect enhances the player's expectation for the big hit. It is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

[Timing Chart when Executing Suggestive Rendering according to Comparative Example]
Here, with reference to FIG. 43, the timing of the suggestive effect according to the comparative example will be described. FIG. 43 is an example of a timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the comparative example executes the suggested effect.

As shown in FIG. 43, the suggestive effect (authentic) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example functions as a genuine effect pattern in which the notice effect is subsequently performed, and the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example is , It functions as a gaze pattern production without any notice production thereafter.

Further, the suggestive effect (authentic) in the first pattern effect of the comparative example is set to the same execution time as the suggestive effect (gase) in the second pattern effect of the comparative example. Therefore, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the effect control device 300 executes the notice effect (authentic) having the same length as the suggestion effect (gase), and then executes the notice effect.

Therefore, compared to the first pattern effect of the second embodiment, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the effect time when the suggestive effect (authenticity) and the subsequent notice effect are executed is extended. The interest of the game cannot be improved like the suggestive effect according to the second embodiment. Further, in the first pattern effect of the comparative example, the suggestive effect (authenticity) is delayed as described above, so that it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the notice effect to be executed thereafter.

[Timing chart when executing suggestive performance]
38A and 38B are screen transition diagrams showing the display screens of the display device 41 according to the second embodiment in time series, and are examples of screen transitions when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game. ..

FIG. 38A(A) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the variable display game is being executed. The decorative first designs A to C in the variable display area 610 and the small decorative second designs (small patterns, decorative special patterns) in the variable display area 615 are in a state of variable display “↓↓↓”.

One hold display 633a (starting memory display, stock hold) corresponding to the first starting memory (special figure 1 starting winning memory) is displayed on the first holding display unit 630a, and a change in execution in the holding exhaustion area 640. A starting memory display (a changing pending display, a digesting pending display) corresponding to the starting memory related to the display game is displayed.

The special figure 1 reserved number display section 650 displays the number "1" indicating the special figure 1 reserved number, and the special figure 2 reserved number display section 660 displays the number "0" indicating the special figure 2 reserved number. There is.

In addition, a stage display 730 that displays the current stage (mode, situation of effect background) is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen of the display device 41. On the stage display 730, the characters “normal stage” indicating that the current stage is a normal stage are displayed.

FIG. 38A(B) is a display screen of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect is executed during the variable display game.

When the suggestive effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 38A(B), a large suggestive effect display 731 is displayed in the central portion of the display screen of the display device 41. The suggestion effect display 731 is an effect display that gives a predetermined suggestion, and is an effect display that suggests the possibility of transitioning from the current stage to a different stage (for example, a “tiger zone” described later). The suggestion effect display 731 is displayed semi-transparently on the display screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 38A(B), and the player visually recognizes the decorative first pattern A to C that is changing together with the suggestion effect display 731. You can The suggestion effect display 731 is not limited to the semitransparent large display in the central portion of the display screen, and may be a small display or a predetermined character. The effect in the form of FIG. 38A(B) is commonly executed by the suggestive effect (authentic) and the suggestive effect (gase), and in the state of FIG. 38A(B), the player makes a transition to a different stage (that is, a predetermined stage). It is suggested that the notice production) may be executed, but it is unclear whether the transition of this stage is actually executed.

38A(C) and FIG. 38B(D) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect functions as the true pattern effect in the first pattern effect. When the suggested effect is a true pattern effect, the stage display 730 is enlarged and displayed on the front surface (upper layer) of the suggested effect display 731. On the stage display 730, for example, a character such as “tiger zone plunge!!”, which indicates that the current stage has transitioned to the “tiger zone”, is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 38B(D), in the stage display 730, characters “tiger zone” indicating that the current stage is “tiger zone” are displayed. Further, the effect control device 300 can change the background or the like of the display screen in response to the transition of the current stage, and the player who visually recognizes the change of the background or the like can enjoy the effect on the new stage. Therefore, the enjoyment of the game can be improved. The transition of the stage to the "tiger zone" (including displaying characters such as "tiger zone entry!!" and "tiger zone") suggests the expectation of a big hit (eg, high expectation). It becomes a predetermined notice effect (so-called zone effect). On the "tiger zone" stage, a specific background image may be displayed as a background image on the display screen. It should be noted that the predetermined notice effect is not limited to the zone effect, and may be another effect such as a dialogue notice effect or a character notice effect. After that, the variable display game has a stop result, so that the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbol are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 38A(E), when the suggestive effect is a gaze pattern effect, the effect control device 300 displays the effect effect display in a large semitransparent manner in the central portion of the display screen of the display device 41. The display state of 731 is maintained.

38A(E) and FIG. 38B(F) are display screens of the display device 41 when the suggestive effect functions as a gasse pattern effect in the second pattern effect. 38A(E), the stage display 730 in the upper left portion of the display screen is hidden, but it may be displayed. Then, when the effect control device 300 finishes the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect display 731 displayed on the display screen is hidden as shown in FIG. 38B(F). It should be noted that the stage does not transit to the "tiger zone" as a predetermined notice effect, and thereafter, the variable display game has a stop result, so that the decoration first symbols A to C and the decoration second symbol are stopped and displayed. ..

[First Modified Example and Second Modified Example of Timing Chart when Executing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 39 is a first modification example and a second modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 39(A), the timing of the suggestive effect according to the first modified example of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the first modified example of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 executes the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity) as the authentic pattern effect in which the notice effect is subsequently performed. After the end of the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity), the effect control device 300 executes the notice effect.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the first modified example, the effect control device 300 executes the first-half suggestion effect and the second-half suggestion effect (gase) as a gasse pattern effect for which the notice effect is not subsequently performed.

Here, the effect control device 300, in the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect according to the first modification, executes a common first-half suggestion effect having the same content when viewed by the player. The common first half suggestive effect may be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 38A(B). According to such an aspect, since the effect control device 300 can use common data when performing the first-half suggestion effect in the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, the effect time of the first pattern effect is extended. It is possible to reduce the load and the processing load.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39(B), the timing of suggestive effect according to the second modified example of the second embodiment will be described.

In the first pattern effect according to the second modification example of the second embodiment, the effect control device 300 executes the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity), similarly to the first pattern effect according to the first modification example, and the first-half suggestion effect. The notice production is executed after the production (authenticity) ends.

On the other hand, in the second pattern effect according to the second modified example, the effect control device 300 executes the first-half suggestion effect and the second-half suggestion effect (gase) as a gasse pattern effect for which the notice effect is not subsequently performed.

Here, the effect control device 300 executes a common suggestion effect having the same content when the player visually recognizes the first half suggestion effect and the second half suggestion effect of the second pattern effect. According to such an aspect, since the effect control device 300 can use common data for the first half suggestive effect and the second half suggestive effect when executing the second pattern effect, the data read immediately before is looped as it is. It can be used and the processing load can be further reduced. Further, in the authentic pattern effect of the first pattern effect, the notice effect is performed after the first-half suggestion effect (authenticity), so that the effect time of the first pattern effect is delayed as in the first modified example. it can.

Note that the first modified example of FIG. 39(A) and the modified example of FIG. 39(B) are combined to execute the first half suggestive effect common to the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, and the first half of the second pattern effect. A common suggestive effect may be executed for the suggestive effect and the latter half suggestive effect. According to such an aspect, the effect control device 300 uses common data for the first-half suggestive effect of the first pattern effect, the first-half suggestive effect of the second pattern effect, and the second-half suggestive effect of the second pattern effect. Therefore, the processing load can be greatly reduced.

[Third Modified Example of Timing Chart When Performing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 40 is a third modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

In the third modified example, the effect control device 300, in the same manner as in the first modified example and the second modified example, in addition to executing the first pattern effect and the second pattern effect, creates the second half suggested effect in a plurality of suggested effects. The third pattern effect divided into can be executed.

In the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the first-half suggestive effect, and then sequentially executes the latter-half suggestive effect by dividing it into, for example, the second-first suggestion (gase) and the second-second suggestion (reverse).

After the second half suggestive production, the first suggestion (gase) is a suggestive production that makes the player think that the subsequent notice production is not performed, and is a part of the second half suggestive production (gase). A suggestive presentation common to

In addition, the second suggestion (reverse) of the latter half suggestive effect is a reverse effect that is performed after the second suggestive effect (gase), and suggests that the notice effect is performed after the player has once thought of the gasse pattern effect. It is a kind of authentic pattern production.

In the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300 executes the inversion effect of the second suggestion (reverse) after the first suggestion (reverse). Therefore, it is possible to give a positive surprise that the notice effect will be given to the player who thought that the notice effect will not be given due to the gasse pattern effect of 1st suggestion (gase). Can be improved.

In addition, the effect control device 300 divides the latter half suggestive effect of the third pattern effect into two (1st suggestion and 2nd suggestion), but it may be divided into three or more to perform the latter suggestion effect. ..

[Fourth Modification Example of Timing Chart when Performing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 41 is a fourth modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

In the fourth modified example, the effect control device 300 can execute the first to third pattern effects with different execution times of the suggestive effect.

In the first pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can sequentially execute the notice effect and the reach effect, for example, after executing the first suggestion effect (first suggestion) as the genuine pattern effect, and the stop result of the subsequent variable display game. Can be a big hit (special result). At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the first suggestive effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the second suggestive effect.

Further, in the second pattern effect, the effect control device 300 can set the stop result of the variable display game to be out, after executing the second suggestion effect (second suggestion) as the goose pattern effect, for example. At that time, the effect control device 300 executes the second suggestive effect so as to be shorter than the execution time of the third suggestive effect.

Further, in the third pattern effect, the effect control device 300, for example, after executing the third suggestion effect (third suggestion) as the genuine pattern effect, can sequentially execute the notice effect and the reach effect, and the subsequent variable display game. The stop result can be a big hit (special result). The third suggestive effect has a longer execution time than the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect.

On the other hand, the effect control device 300 of the fourth modified example plays the variable display game so that the change times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect in which the notice effect is executed are the same time. Further, the variation time of the second pattern effect in which the notice effect is not executed is set shorter than the variation time of the first and third pattern effects. Therefore, since the variation times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect are the same time, even if the execution time of the third suggestive effect in the third pattern effect is long, the overall variation time of the third pattern effect is long. It is possible to reduce the delay and improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, the variable display game in the case where the second pattern effect in which the gazette pattern effect is performed can be ended earlier than in the case where the first pattern effect or the second pattern effect in which the genuine pattern effect is performed is selected. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the production in which the player's expectations are not increased, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, the execution time of the third suggestive effect (third suggestion), which is the genuine pattern effect of the third pattern effect, is longer than the execution time of the second suggestive effect (second suggestion), which is the bad pattern effect of the second pattern effect. become longer. On the other hand, since the notice effect of the third pattern effect is shorter than the notice effect of the first pattern effect, the variation times of the first pattern effect and the third pattern effect are the same time.

Therefore, since the effect control device 300 performs the suggestive effect by making the execution time of the third suggestive effect, which is the genuine pattern effect, longer than the execution time of the second suggestive effect, which is the false pattern effect, compared with the normal variation mode. It is possible to further increase the player's expectation that the notice production having a high expectation of a big hit will be executed thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, since the effect control device 300 can execute the third pattern effect at the same time as the first pattern effect without delaying the entire variation time, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The start timings of the first to third suggestive effects are set to be the same and are executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 41, but may be performed at the start of fluctuation. .. Reach productions are not limited to reach productions such as SP1 to 3 reach and premium reach, but may include pre-reading announcements, pseudo continuous productions, continuous announcements (announcements of chances), step-up announcements, and after counting a predetermined number of seconds. It may include a timer notice (countdown notice, x-second notice) for giving a notice.

Moreover, as described above, the effect control device 300 uses the first-half suggestive effects in the first to third suggestive effects as a common aspect so that the processing load when executing the first to third suggestive effects is reduced. It is also possible to execute each suggestive effect.

[Fifth Modified Example of Timing Chart when Executing Suggestive Rendering]
FIG. 42 is a fifth modification example of the timing chart when the effect control device 300 according to the second embodiment executes the suggested effect.

The suggestive effect executed by the effect control device 300 can also be applied to a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous) as shown in FIG. 42. The effect control device 300 pseudo-provisionally displays the decorative special symbol (decorative first symbol A to C) which is variably displayed, from the start to the end of one variation display game (special figure variation display game). It is possible to execute the pseudo continuous production in which the pseudo variation (single production, sub production, sub variation) for performing the stop display (pseudo stop display) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times.

In the pseudo continuous effect of FIG. 42, the effect control device 300 executes a suggested effect (authenticity) as a true pattern effect in the first pseudo variation (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect. The effect control device 300 can, for example, indicate by suggestion effect (authenticity) that the pseudo variation from the second time onward succeeds and continues.

Then, in the notice effect executed after the suggestion effect (authenticity), the effect control device 300 displays, for example, a character (for example, "run") indicating that the pseudo variation succeeds on the decorative special pattern C and gives a notice. Can be performed. In the notice production, the production control device 300 may display a character indicating that the pseudo-variation succeeds and continues on the decorative special symbols A and B, or by displaying a character or a figure other than "run". A notice production may be executed.

Subsequently, the effect control device 300 executes a suggested effect (gase) as a gasse pattern effect at the second pseudo variation (single effect) of the pseudo continuous effect. The effect control device 300 can suggest, for example, that the pseudo variation after the third time succeeds and does not continue (ends in failure) by the suggestion effect (gase). The suggestive effect (gase) may be divided into a first-half suggestive effect and a second-half suggestive effect, and a common suggestive effect may be repeated so as to reduce the processing load.

Then, the effect control device 300 suggests that the pseudo-variation ends without continuation (failure) during the suggestive effect (gase) (for example, at the end of the suggestive effect), and then the variation display game is removed. It can be stopped in a manner.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42, the pseudo-variation performed a plurality of times (for example, the first and second times) performed by the effect control device 300 has the same time in both the successful authentic pattern effect and the unsuccessful gasse pattern effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the effect time when the pseudo-variation succeeds or fails, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Operation/Effect of Second Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes a game control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game (a variable display game, a special figure variable display game), and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the game ( With the effect control device 300), a special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player can be generated when the result of the game is a special result (big hit). The effect control means, as the suggested effect, a first suggested effect (a genuine pattern effect, an suggested effect (authentic)) in which a predetermined notice effect is executed after the execution, and a second suggested effect in which the predetermined notice effect is not executed after the execution ( It is possible to select and execute at least one of the gasse pattern effect and the suggestive effect (gase), and the second suggestive effect selects the execution time of the suggestive effect when the first suggestive effect is selected. The execution time should be shorter than the above.

According to such a gaming machine 10, the effect control means, the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, suggestion) so that the execution time is shorter than the second suggestive effect (gase pattern effect, suggestive effect (gase)). Performing production (authenticity)). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the delay in the effect time when the first suggestion effect and the subsequent notice effect are executed, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, the first suggestive effect ends relatively early as compared with the second suggestive effect, and the player can easily pay attention to the notice effect to be executed thereafter, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) causes the game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the second suggestive effect (gasse pattern effect, suggestive effect (gase)) is selected. More, the game time (variation time) of the game when the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, suggestive effect (authentic)) is selected is lengthened. According to such a gaming machine 10, compared with the second pattern effect including the second suggestive effect, the notice effect is provided by the first pattern effect including the first suggestive effect and having a relatively high expectation (reliability) of the big hit. Since it is possible to secure the time to play, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the big hit by the notice production, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have the same start timing and have a common mode (first half suggestion effect). Since the effect control device 300 can use common data when performing the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, it is possible to reduce the delay in the effect time of the first suggestive effect and to reduce the processing load. You can

Further, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300), the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, first suggestion) in which a predetermined notice effect is executed after execution as the suggestive effect. And at least one of the third suggestion effect (authentic pattern effect, third suggestion) and the second suggestive effect (gasse pattern effect, second suggestion) in which a predetermined notice effect is not executed after execution. It is feasible. Further, the effect control means makes the execution time of the suggestive effect when the first suggestive effect is selected shorter than the execution time when the second suggestive effect is selected, and the second suggestive effect is selected. In this case, the execution time of the suggestive effect is set shorter than the execution time when the third suggestive effect is selected.

According to such a gaming machine 10, since the execution time of the third suggestion effect, which is the true pattern effect, is set longer than the execution time of the second suggestion effect, which is the gaze pattern effect, the suggestion effect is performed, the expectation of a big hit It is possible to further enhance the player's expectation that a high-quality notice production will be executed thereafter, and to improve the interest of the game. Moreover, since the effect control means can execute the third suggestion effect at the same time as the first suggestion effect without delaying the entire variation time, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) determines the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, than the game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the second suggestive effect (gase pattern effect, second suggestion) is selected. The game time (fluctuation time) of the game when the first suggestion) or the third suggestion production (authentic pattern production, third suggestion) is selected is lengthened. According to such a gaming machine 10, as compared with the case where the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, which is the true pattern effect, is selected, the case where the second suggestion effect is the gas pattern effect is selected. Since the game can be ended early, it is possible to reduce the delay in the production in which the player's expectations are not increased, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The effect control means (effect control device 300), the game time (variation time) of the game when the first suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, first suggestion) is selected, and the third suggestive effect (authentic pattern effect, first). The game time (fluctuation time) of the game when (3 suggestions) is selected is set to the same length. According to such a gaming machine 10, since the game time of the game is the same when the first suggestive effect is selected and when the third suggestive effect is selected, the execution time of the third suggestive effect is long. Even if it becomes, it is possible to reduce the delay of the entire variation time and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The first suggestive effect, the second suggestive effect, and the third suggestive effect have the same start timing and a common aspect. According to such a gaming machine 10, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned effects and reduce the processing load of suggestive effect.

[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 44 to 59. The configurations other than those described below may be similar to those of the first and second embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals are used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first and second embodiments, and the duplicate description will be omitted as appropriate.

[Basic configuration of gaming machines]
FIG. 44 is a front view of the game board 30 of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 45 is a perspective view of the game board 30. 46 is an enlarged view of the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 45. The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment is characterized in that a rotating body unit 800 (winning stabilizing means, guiding means) described later is arranged in the gaming machine 10 of the first and second embodiments.

In the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment and the like, a game area 32 is provided in an area surrounded by the guide rails 31, and a center case 40 is attached to the approximate center of the game area 32. A display device 41 is attached behind the central window of the center case 40.

An upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) is provided on the upper part of the center case 40, a lamp display device 80 is provided on the left side, and a side effect unit 40d is provided on the right side.

A starting winning opening 36 (winning area) is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 32, and a normal variable winning device 37 (movable member 37b) (winning area) is provided on the right side and slightly higher position thereof, and further on the upper right. A universal figure starting gate 34 (winning area) is arranged in. Further, in the game area 32, a special variation winning device 39 (opening/closing door 39c) is arranged at a position above the universal figure starting gate 34.

In the first embodiment, a tube-shaped warp passage 40e (first intake passage) having an inflow port 40a communicating with the left side of the game area 32 and at a position substantially in the center in the height direction, and the warp passage 40e. It has a configuration including a stage portion 40b that receives the game ball rolled from and flows down the game ball toward the game area 32 including the start winning hole 36.

On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the rotating body unit 800 (guide means) is provided on the back side (rear side) of the stage portion 40b. Further, the lower end of the warp passage 40e (guide means) is connected to the rotating body unit 800, and the game ball rolling in the warp passage 40e is supplied to the upper surface of the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810). The rotator unit 800 may be configured to be engaged with the stage portion 40b by a groove or the like, or may be integrally formed with the stage portion 40b. Further, the display device 41 is arranged behind the rotary unit 800.

In the vicinity of the inlet 40a on the left side of the game area 32, obstacle nails (not shown) are provided so that 80-90% of the game balls (the left-handed game balls) that flow down to the left in the game area 32 flow down to the inlet 40a. ) Has been planted.

[Basic configuration of rotating body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the rotating body unit 800 includes a rotating stage 810 on which a game ball rolls, and a tray portion 801 that surrounds the periphery of the rotating stage 810. The rotating stage 810 and the tray portion 801 are The game area 32 is inclined downward (for example, the inclination angle is about 5 degrees). As a result, the rotating body unit 800 can cause the game ball to flow down toward the game area 32 including the start winning opening 36.

The tray portion 801 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped rolling surface 802 (bottom surface) on which a game ball rolls, and wall portions 803A, 803B, and 803C arranged at the outer edge of the rolling surface 802. The wall portion 803A is a member that rises from the edge of the rolling surface 802 on the display device 41 side and extends in the width direction (left and right direction of the gaming machine 10), and the wall portion 803B rises from the left edge of the rolling surface 802. Is a member that extends in the depth direction (the front-back direction of the gaming machine 10), and the wall portion 803C is a member that rises from the right edge of the rolling surface 802 and extends in the depth direction.

One end of the tray portion 801 is arranged on the stage portion 40b with the downstream portion of the stage portion 40b exposed. The rolling surface 802 is open at the edge facing the game area 32 side, and, as described above, is inclined downward toward the game area 32 side, so the game ball supplied to the rolling surface 802 rolls. It flows down from the edge of the surface 802 on the side of the game area 32 toward the game area 32 through the downstream portion of the stage portion 40b (stage portion 40b1, stage portion 40b2).

A part of the wall portion 803B facing the warp passage 40e is opened, and the lower end of the warp passage 40e is connected to the opened portion. Further, the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 is provided with a protrusion shape extending toward the rotary stage 810 from a position adjacent to the lower end of the warp passage 40e, and guide ribs for guiding the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotary stage 810. 804 is formed. The guide rib 804 guides the game ball in a direction between the width direction of the tray unit 801 and the center direction (front-back direction) of the tray unit 801 from the position closer to the wall 803A than the rotation axis of the rotation stage 810. It is formed. The guide rib 804 may be omitted when the warp passage 40e is arranged so that the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e directly faces the rotary stage 810 as described above.

The wall portion 803B and the wall portion 803C extend from the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side. An extending portion 806 described below extends from the central portion of the edge. Therefore, the stage part 40b is divided into a left side wall part 803B and a stage part 40b1 partitioned by the extension part 806, and a right side wall part 803C and a stage part 40b2 partitioned by the extension part 806.

The rotary stage 810 is a rotating body that has a cylindrical shape and rotates about a cylindrical axis, and its upper surface is a rolling surface 811 on which a game ball rolls. As described above, the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is also inclined downward toward the game area 32.

The rotary stage 810 is rotated by the rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50), and the rotary stage motor 143 (FIG. 50) is driven/stopped by the game control device 100 (FIG. 50) and the rotation speed (rotation direction). Control is performed). The rotary stage 810 normally rotates counterclockwise, but it may rotate clockwise (reverse rotation) as described later.

Notches 812 (holding portions) are formed on the peripheral edge of the rotary stage 810 at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, five notch portions 812 are formed (the number is arbitrary), and the notch portions 812 are formed so that the upper surface and the side surface of the rotary stage 810 are open. The notch portion 812 is formed so that the game ball can be arranged inside in a plan view (top view), and the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 can enter the notch portion 812. It is possible.

Here, the tray portion 801 includes an accommodating portion 805 having an inner wall that follows the side surface of the rotary stage 810, and the rotary stage 810 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 805. Therefore, since the cutout portion 812 faces the inner wall of the storage portion 805, the portion of the cutout portion 812 that is open to the side surface side of the rotary stage 810 is closed by the inner wall of the storage portion 805. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the cutout portion 812 is held by the cutout portion 812 and the inner wall of the accommodation portion 805.

The depth of the cutout portion 812 is preferably deeper than the radius of the game ball and shallower than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed by colliding the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 with the game ball held in the notch 812. In addition, since the depth of the cutout portion 812 is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 so that the cutout portion 812 is removed. It is possible to reduce the popping out.

By the way, the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 (so that the rotary stage 810 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801). You may arrange. At this time, a step is formed between the rotary stage 810 and the tray portion 801, but it is preferable that the step is formed so as to be smaller than the radius of the game ball.

In this case, the game ball supplied from the warp passage 40e moves over the step and moves to the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810, but the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed irregularly when the game ball gets over. Further, although some of the game balls may stay in front of the step without getting over the step, when the cutout 812 comes to a position facing the game ball, the game is played in the cutout 812. It is also possible to let the game ball accumulated on the condition that the ball is not held in the cutout portion 812.

An extension portion 806 extends from the center of the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32 and right above the starting winning opening 36 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine 10. Further, the extension portion 806 and the tray portion 801 linearly penetrate from the tip of the extension portion 806 on the side of the starting winning opening 36 to the inner wall of the accommodation portion 805, and rotate with the open portion of the tip of the extension portion 806. A guide groove 807 that communicates with the side surface of the stage 810 is formed. The guide groove 807 sequentially faces the notch 812 as the rotary stage 810 rotates.

Here, the extending portion 806 forms the same plane as the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801, but the extension portion 806 is higher than the rolling surface 802 (extending portion in the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802. 806 may intersect). Also, the portion of the tray portion 801 adjacent to the guide groove 807 may be formed to be higher than the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 like the extension portion 806.

The bottom surface of the guiding groove 807 is inclined downward toward the starting winning opening 36. The width of the guide groove 807 is wider than the diameter of the game ball. The bottom surface of the guide groove 807 is arranged so as not to form a convex step when viewed from the bottom surface of the cutout portion 812. On the other hand, the bottom surface of the cutout portion 812 is inclined downward toward the game area 32 side similarly to the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801. Therefore, when the cutout portion 812 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 is introduced into the guide groove 807, and from the tip of the guide groove 807 (extension portion 806) to the start winning opening 36. It can flow down.

In addition, a sluice valve 820 (first valve) is arranged at a position of the guide groove 807 which is an entrance of the game ball. The partition valve 820 can be driven in the height direction (the normal direction of the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801) by the valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50), and the partition valve 820 closes the inlet of the guide groove 807. The switching is controlled so that the entrance is opened. The sluice valve 820 is urged by an urging means (spring or the like) in a direction of closing the guide groove 807, but when the valve solenoid 144 is driven, it is urged in a direction (downward direction) of pulling the sluice valve 820 out of the guide groove 807. The guide groove 807 is urged to open, and when the drive of the valve solenoid 144 stops, the urging force of the urging means urges the sluice valve 820 in the direction (upward direction) into the guide groove 807 to close the guide groove 807. .. The valve solenoid 144 is controlled by the game control device 100 and is controlled to open the inlet at the timing when the cutout 812 faces the guide groove 807 (and in most cases where the timing occurs).

The distance between the main surface of the gate valve 820 on the game area 32 side and the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side is preferably shorter than the radius of the game ball. Accordingly, when the partition valve 820 is closed, the game ball rolling in the direction of entering the guide groove 807 from the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 abuts on the partition valve 820 and bounces back to the stage portion 40b1 or the stage portion 40b2. Since it flows down, the game ball can be restricted from entering the guide groove 807.

Further, when the gate valve 820 is closed, the height of the gate valve 820 becomes higher than the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 (the gate valve 820 intersects the same plane formed by the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810). ) Is preferably arranged. Accordingly, when the cutout portion 812 is arranged not to face the guide groove 807, the partition valve 820 blocks the game ball rolling in the direction directly from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 to the guide groove 807. Since the rolling direction is changed by the lever, it is possible to restrict the game ball not held in the cutout portion 812 from directly entering the guide groove 807.

When the game ball is constantly supplied to the rotary stage 810, the game ball is held in all of the cutouts 812 of the rotary stage 810, and the rotary stage 810 is rotating at a constant rotation speed, the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807). Since most of the game balls flowing from) enter the starting winning opening 36, the winning frequency is almost constant. Therefore, when only the game balls that enter the starting winning opening 36 flow down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807), the start value S of the gaming machine 10 depends on the rotation speed of the rotating stage 810, but is constant. Becomes In the present embodiment, the start value S is the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the normal game state (when left-handed) per predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), that is, the game ball is won at the start winning port 36. Is the number of times per predetermined period.

By the way, in the rotating body unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the extending part 806 (the guiding groove 807), the game ball flowing down from the stage part 40b1, and the game ball flowing down from the stage part 40b2 include the start winning opening 36. It flows down toward the game area 32.

Here, an interval in the height direction between the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) (and the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2) and the starting winning opening 36 is longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the central portions of the stage portion 40b1 and the stage portion 40b2 have a concave surface shape that is inclined toward the game area 32 side.

Therefore, for example, when the game ball flows down from the outer side in the left-right direction of the concave shape toward the center (the extending portion 806 side), the game ball flows down from the stage part 40b1 and the stage part 40b2 to the start winning opening 36. It is more likely to run down. Therefore, most of the game balls that have flowed down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) win the start winning opening 36, but the game balls collide with the game balls that have flowed down from the stage part 40b1 or the stage part 40b2, and the start winning award. The winning of the prize in the mouth 36 may be hindered.

Moreover, the game ball flowing down from the stage part 40b1 or the stage part 40b2 may win the starting winning opening 36 without colliding with the game ball flowing down from the extending part 806 (guide groove 807).

By the way, as shown in FIG. 45, for example, dojos (not shown) are planted in a row in the direction toward the starting winning opening 36 from the position below the windmill in the game area 32 as a base point. There is a case in which the game ball that has flowed in following the above-mentioned wins in the starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the game ball flowing down from the rotating body unit 800 collides with the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (such as a road nail) without passing through the rotating body unit 800, and the winning in the starting winning opening 36 is hindered. In some cases.

In addition, the game ball flowing down the doge may jump and get on the rotary stage 810 or the tray unit 801.

As described above, without passing through the rotating body unit 800, the game ball flowing down from the extending part 806 (the guiding groove 807), the game ball flowing down from the stage part 40b1, the game ball flowing down from the stage part 40b2. When the game ball flowing down the game area 32 and the starting winning opening 36 interfere with each other (collide) with each other, the winning frequency to the starting winning opening 36 of the gaming ball, that is, the start value S may vary to some extent. become. Of course, a configuration is also possible in which all of the game balls that have flowed down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) win the starting winning opening 36. In this case, for example, obstacle nails are appropriately arranged on both sides in the width direction of the route from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) to the starting winning opening 36, and the game flows down from other than the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807). It suffices that the ball does not collide with the game ball flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807).

In the present embodiment, as described above, the start value S can be stabilized, but it is difficult to predict the rolling destination of the game ball in the rotary unit 800 and the destination of the game ball flowing from the rotary unit 800. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the rolling and downflow of the game balls, which can enhance the interest.

In the present embodiment, the rotating body unit 800 is described on the premise that the game ball flows down toward the starting winning opening 36, but other winning areas, for example, the universal figure starting gate 34, the general winning. The gaming ball may be made to flow down toward any of the mouth 35, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variation winning device 39.

[The behavior of the game ball in the rotating unit]
FIG. 47 is a plan view (sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit 800, and is a view (part 1) showing a state of the game balls in the rotating body unit 800. FIG. 48 is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit 800, and is a diagram (part 2) showing the state of the game balls in the rotating body unit 800. FIG. 49 is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of the rotating body unit 800, and is a diagram (part 3) showing the state of the game balls in the rotating body unit 800.

The behavior of the game ball supplied to the rotating body unit 800 will be examined. As shown in FIG. 47, the game ball is held in at least one of the five cutouts 812, and the guide groove 807 does not face the cutout 812, and the inlet of the guide groove 807 is partitioned off. Consider a case where the game ball flows down from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) to the rotary stage 810 while the 820 is closed.

In this case, since the rolling direction changes irregularly when the game ball rides on the rotary stage 810 as described above, the game ball directly contacts the empty notch 812 as shown in [1] in FIG. 47. When entering, or as shown in [2] in FIG. 47, the game ball passes between empty cutouts 812, flows down from the rotary stage 810, and collides with the wall 803C of the tray 801. A behavior of flowing down to the stage portion 40b2 and flowing down to the game area 32 can be considered.

Also, as shown in [3] in FIG. 47, when the game ball rolls on the rotary stage 810 in the same manner as [1], but the game ball is already held in the cutout 812 at the tip of the game ball. It is also conceivable that the rolling game ball collides with the held game ball to change the rolling direction and enter another notch portion 812. In any case, the game ball flowing down to the rotary stage 810 finally flows down toward the game area 32, but on the way, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 and the wall portions 803A, 803B, 803C. When the rotary stage 810 and the tray unit 801 collide with each other, they can roll in any direction.

Further, as shown by [4] in FIG. 47, there is also a game ball rolling toward the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) in the tray portion 801 (rolling surface 802). In this case, the game ball starts falling to cross the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801 when it exceeds the edge of the tray portion 801 on the side of the game area 32, and then on the side surface of the extending portion 806. Most of the game balls will collide and fall to the stage section 40b1. The game ball that has fallen on the stage portion 40b1 (stage portion 40b2) falls toward the game area 32 (or the starting winning opening 36).

Further, there may be a game ball that rolls in a direction reaching the guide groove 807 before intersecting the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side. However, by designing the gap between the main surface of the sluice valve 820 on the game area 32 side and the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side to be smaller than the radius of the game sphere, the game sphere becomes the sluice valve 820. Most of the game balls will collide and flow down to the stage section 40b1 and the stage section 40b2.

Furthermore, there is a game ball rolling from the rotary stage 810 toward the guide groove 807, but when the height of the partition valve 820 is higher than the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810, most of the game ball is partitioned. Collision with the valve 820 and entry into the guide groove 807 is prevented.

As described above, when the partition valve 820 closes the inlet of the guide groove 807, the game ball hardly enters the guide groove 807.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball is held in at least one of the five cutouts 812, and the sluice valve 820 is held at a timing when the guide groove 807 faces the cutout 812 holding the game ball. Consider a case where the game ball flows down from the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) to the rotary stage 810 while the entrance of the guide groove 807 is open.

By opening the sluice valve 820 at the timing when the cutout portion 812 holding the game ball facing the guide groove 807 faces the guide groove 807, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 is guided to the guide groove 807. It can be made to flow toward the starting winning opening 36 via.

For example, when the cycle of one rotation of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds, the gate valve 820 opens every 8 seconds, and the gate valve 820 opens at the timing when the cutout 812 faces the guide groove 807. , Every 8 seconds, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 can be almost flowed down into the guide groove 807. At this time, in the case where the game balls are held in all the cutouts 512, after the first game balls flow down toward the start winning port 36, all the remaining game balls face toward the starting winning port 36. It takes 32 seconds to flow down. It should be noted that it takes a predetermined time for the cutout portion 812 to flow the game ball down to the guide groove 807 after receiving it from the warp passage 40e. Considering the case where the game ball directly enters from the guide rib 804 into the cutout portion 812 [2] at the time of the arrangement shown in FIG. 48, the predetermined time is 16 seconds when the rotary stage 810 is counterclockwise (in the case of a one-lap delay, 56 seconds) and 24 seconds in the case of clockwise rotation (64 seconds in the case of a delay of one round). Here, the start value S in this case is 7.5 times/minute as long as the winning from the slot other than the guide groove 807 to the starting winning opening 36 is negligible. Also, in order to set the start value S to 7.5 times/minute, one or more game balls per 8 seconds, that is, 7.5 or more game balls per minute (more than the number corresponding to the start value S) are warped. It is supplied to the rotary stage 810 from 40e.

Further, for example, consider a case where the sluice valve 820 opens every 3 seconds, and the sluice valve 820 opens at the timing when any of the notches 812 faces the guide groove 807 in the initial state. In the initial state, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812[1] can flow down to the guide groove 807. After that, for each product (24 seconds) of the [opening period of the gate valve 820 (3 seconds)] and the [opposing period of the notch portion 812 with the guide groove 807 (8 seconds)], the notch portion 812 [2] is cut. The game balls held in the notch portion 812[3], the notch portion 812[4], and the notch portion 812[5] can almost flow into the guide groove 807 in this order. At this time, in the case where the game balls are held in all the cutouts 512, after the first game balls flow down toward the start winning port 36, all the remaining game balls face toward the starting winning port 36. It takes 96 seconds to flow down. In this case, since the winning per minute from the guiding groove 807 to the starting winning opening 36 is small, in order to increase the start value S, the winning from the portion other than the guiding groove 807 to the starting winning opening 36 is performed. increase.

On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down to the rotary stage 810 enters the empty cutout portion 812 as shown in [6], the game ball (or wall portion 803A held in the cutout portion 812 as shown in [7]. , 803B, 803C) to change the rolling direction and flow down to the stage section 40b1 (or the stage section 40b2).

As shown in FIG. 49, when the partition valve 820 opens the inlet of the guide groove 807 at the timing when the guide groove 807 faces the cutout portion 812 that does not hold the game ball, the warp passage 40e (guide rib 804) causes Consider a case where the game ball flows down to the rotary stage 810.

In this case, as for the game ball rolling on the tray portion 801, as shown in FIG. 49, the game ball that has once come out of the rotary stage 810 collides with the wall portion 803C and returns to the rotary stage 810 again to guide grooves. In some cases, it may enter into the guide groove 807 or enter into the guide groove 807 by entering into the notch portion 812 facing this. In this way, there is a possibility that the game ball once ejected from the rotary stage 810 can be re-challenged for the winning of the starting winning port 36. In particular, the smaller the number of game balls held in the cutout portion 812, the higher the possibility of winning in the starting winning opening 36 by re-challenge. As described above, there is a possibility of entering the guide groove 807 without passing through the notch portion 812 and winning the starting winning opening 36, and a game ball flowing down the stage portions 40b1 and 40b2 can winning the starting winning opening 36. Therefore, even if the game balls are held in all the cutouts 812, the value of the above re-challenge is not lost.

In addition, as described above, considering the case where the sluice valve 820 opens every 8 seconds and the case where it opens every 3 seconds, the frequency of opening is higher when opening every 3 seconds. It is highly possible that the guide groove 807 enters the guide groove 807 without passing through the notch portion 812 facing the 807. However, by shortening the opening time of the gate valve 820 (for example, 0.3 seconds), it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of these.

The rotary stage 810 rotates counterclockwise, for example, at a constant rotation speed, but it can be controlled so as to reversely rotate for a short time at a predetermined timing. Thereby, for example, when the game balls are accumulated between the guide rib 804 and the rotary stage 810, it is possible to take them out. In addition, the rotation stage 810 may be reversely rotated at a minute rotation angle and then rotated in the forward direction when the cutout 812 faces the guide groove 807 and then slightly rotates. As a result, even if a game ball is caught between the cutout portion 812 and the tray portion 801, this can be eliminated. Of course, when the cutout portion 812 faces the guide groove 807, control is performed to stop the rotation of the rotary stage 810 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) so that the game ball can surely flow into the guide groove 807. Good.

Further, in FIGS. 45 to 49, the cutout portions 812 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the rotary stage 810, but they may be arranged nonuniformly. In this case, for example, an encoder (not shown) is attached to the rotary stage 810, and a partition valve is provided each time the encoder (not shown) detects a predetermined rotation angle when any of the cutouts 812 faces the guide groove 807. 820 may be configured to open.

In the present embodiment, a configuration that does not use the gate valve 820 is also suitable. For example, a fixed stage (not shown) having substantially the same dimension in the surface direction is arranged below the rotation stage 810, and a plurality of first through holes (having a larger diameter than the game ball diameter) are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the rotation stage 810. And a second through hole is formed at a position facing any of the first through holes of the fixed stage. A second tray portion (not shown, similar to the tray portion 801) is formed under the fixed stage (tray portion 801), and the second tray portion has a second extension portion (not shown, extension portion 806). The same as the above) is provided, and the game ball can flow from the tip of the second extending portion toward the starting winning opening 36. When the game ball flows down to the rotary stage 810, the game ball enters and is held in the first through hole, and when any of the first through holes communicates with the second through hole, the game ball is held in the first through hole. The game ball can flow down toward the starting winning opening 36 through the second through hole, the second tray portion, and the second extending portion. In this case, the cycle in which the game ball can flow down from the second extending portion toward the starting winning port 36 is a value obtained by dividing the [cycle of the rotary stage 810] by the [number of first through holes].

Alternatively, instead of the fixed stage, a movable stage (not shown) that has substantially the same dimensions in the surface direction as the rotary stage 810 and moves in the axial direction is arranged below the rotary stage 810, and after a predetermined time elapses, the movable stage is a game ball. The game balls held in the first through holes are all supplied to the second tray portion by separating from the rotary stage 810 by a distance longer than the diameter of the movable stage, and the movable stage is returned to the original position and is in the second tray portion. You may make it flow down all the game balls toward the starting winning opening 36.

In the present invention, the guiding means is based on the rotating body unit 800, but as another configuration, it is arranged immediately below the first stage (not shown) that receives the game ball that has flowed down the warp passage 40e. A stage having a second stage (not shown, arranged at the same position as the tray unit 801) is also applicable.

The first stage is formed of, for example, a transparent member (not necessarily transparent), and is provided with a drop mechanism in the center thereof for dropping the game ball toward the second stage and changing the drop timing irregularly. ing. The drop mechanism has an obtuse-angled taper inner wall (a slanting angle is gentle) whose diameter becomes smaller toward the bottom so that the game ball can roll, and a lower end has a first through hole through which the game ball can pass. , Are provided.

The second stage is provided with a plurality of branch paths that radially branch around a position directly below the dropping mechanism, and one of the branch paths is arranged so that a game ball can be almost won in the starting winning opening. The remaining branch route allows the game ball to flow toward the game area 32 (rarely toward the starting winning opening 36).

At a branch position of the branch path (a position directly below the drop mechanism), a movable portion (which can rotate or swing) is arranged. The movable portion has, for example, a conical shape with a gentle inclination having a direction along the normal of the second stage as a rotation axis and having the rotation axis as an apex, and having a radial uneven shape with the apex as a center, A plurality of recesses formed by the uneven shape serves as a guide for temporarily holding the game ball and guiding it to the branch path.

Since the game ball that has flowed down from the warp passage 40e to the first stage can enter the dropping mechanism from any direction, the number of times the inner wall of the dropping mechanism goes around (or the number of times of reciprocation) is different. The route to reach changes irregularly for each game ball. Therefore, the fall timing of the game ball that has flowed down to the drop mechanism changes irregularly.

The game sphere that has fallen from the first through hole falls near the apex of the movable part, so it becomes irregular in which direction it rolls from the apex of the movable part, and the direction in which it is guided also affects the timing of the game sphere's fall. It changes depending on the rotation direction, the rotation speed and the phase of the movable part (direction of the recess), and the like. Therefore, the branch path on which the game ball flows down also changes irregularly for each game ball.

However, since the number of branch paths is finite, the number of downflow paths for the game balls is smaller than the number of downflow paths for the game balls that flow down only in the game area where the windmill and obstacle nails are arranged. Therefore, the frequency (probability density) that a certain number of game balls can be won in the starting winning opening 36 within a predetermined time is higher than that of the conventional gaming machine, and the start value S is also stable.

In addition, it is possible to visually recognize how the game ball falls from the drop mechanism and how the game ball can be distributed to the branch route by the movable part and win the starting winning opening, and the player is interested in the movement of the game ball. This can enhance the interest of the game.

As another configuration, the guide groove 807 may be provided below the second stage (without the branch channel). At this time, at least one of the concave portions forming the concave-convex shape of the movable portion is a slit (notch) through which the game ball can penetrate. Further, a second through hole through which the game ball can penetrate is formed at a position directly below the movable part of the second stage, and when the slit and the second through hole have a predetermined angle, the slit and the second through hole are in communication with each other. In addition, the game ball flowing down the second through hole flows down to the guide groove 807.

Then, when the game ball dropped from the drop mechanism flows down into the slit at the timing when the slit and the second through hole communicate with each other, the game ball flowing down into the slit flows down into the guide groove 807 through the second through hole and starts winning. Run down toward mouth 36. The game balls that did not flow down to the second through hole in the second stage should flow down toward the game area 32 (rarely the starting winning opening 36) via the second stage (stage part 40b1 or stage part 40b2). May be.

Here, the slit and the second through hole may be formed so as to have a width and a diameter larger than that of the concave portion which constitutes the uneven shape of the movable portion.

Further, the warp passage 40e is branched by using a distribution device 850 or the like described later, one of which is allocated toward the first stage by the warp passage 40e to flow down, and the other of which is flowed down into a branch flow passage toward the second through hole. You can The movable part is arranged between the lower end of the branch passage and the second through hole, but when the game ball flows down from the branch flow path at the timing when the slit and the second through hole communicate, the game ball is It may flow down to the second through hole, and at other timings, it may flow down toward the game area 32 (rarely the starting winning opening 36) via the second stage (stage part 40b1 or stage part 40b2).

Further, instead of the rotating body unit 800, a swing member having a groove in which the game ball can roll may be used. The oscillating member oscillates (vibrates, swings) around a substantially vertical axis at a predetermined cycle, and one end of the groove faces the lower end of the warp passage 40e (or the guide rib 804) every half cycle. It swings (vibrates) so that the other end of the groove faces the guide groove 807. The partition valve 820 may not be provided. If the groove and the guide groove 807 have a certain width, even with such a configuration, the game ball can be won at the starting winning opening 36 regularly (every half of the above-mentioned cycle), and the start value S Can be stabilized.

[Control system]
FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure game process of the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the game control device 100 can control the driving/stopping of the rotary stage motor 143 that rotates the rotary stage 810 and the valve solenoid 144 that drives the partition valve 820. That is, the gaming microcomputer 111 that constitutes the gaming control device 100 sends a control signal relating to the rotational speed (including reverse rotation) of the rotary stage 810 via the data bus 140, the output port 141, and the fifth driver 138e. It can be transmitted to the motor 143. Similarly, the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit a timing signal to the valve solenoid 144 of the partition valve 820 at the timing of opening the partition valve 820. The control signal is a signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 40 seconds described above). The timing signal is a signal for driving the gate valve 820 at a predetermined time interval (for example, 8 seconds or 3 seconds described above).

In the game control device 100, a first proximity switch 72a, a second proximity switch 72b (third detection means), and a third proximity switch 72c (first switch) which will be described later, via the proximity I/F 121 and the input ports 124 and 126. Detection means) and the detection signal transmitted from the fourth proximity switch 72d (second detection means), respectively. In addition, the game control device 100 can respectively transmit a drive signal to a valve solenoid 144, a valve solenoid 145, and a valve solenoid 146 described later via the output port 141 and the fifth driver 138e.

The game control device 100, for example, when a touch switch signal is input from the operation handle 24 (or when the driving of the ball launching device is detected), a control signal and timing for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction (counterclockwise). The transmission of signals can be started.

Further, the game control device 100 releases the customer waiting state of the gaming machine 10 by inputting a signal for detecting a game ball such as a winning opening switch 35a and a starting opening 1 switch 36a instead of the touch switch signal. Then, the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction can be started.

Then, the game control device 100 stops the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal during the right hitting state such as the big hit state, the time saving state, or the positive change state (excluding the latent probability change) (the left hit state may be used), When the right-handed state (or left-handed state) is completed, the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction can be restarted. Thereby, the power consumption of the rotary stage 810 during right-handedness is avoided, and the game ball held on the rotary stage 810 is wastefully started when the right-handed state has the maximum number of holdings (starting memory number). You can avoid getting into 36.

In addition, the game control device 100, for example, when the latency probability change (other specific game state may also occur) occurs, after that, a predetermined time (the latency probability change continues even after the predetermined time has elapsed), or the latency. The control signal is stopped (or the control signal for rotating in the reverse direction (clockwise) is transmitted) and the transmission of the timing signal is stopped until the probability change ends (the state in which the gate valve 820 closes the inlet of the guide groove 807). May be continued), and then a control signal and a timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction may be transmitted. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that the latent probability change has occurred.

Then, in the state in which the latent probability variation occurs as described above and the rotating stage 810 is rotating, for example, when the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37 detects a game ball, the control for rotating the rotating stage 810. The signal may be stopped. When the latent probability variation occurs, the control signal and the timing signal for rotating the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction may be transmitted from the beginning so that the rotary stage 810 does not suggest the latent probability variation.

Further, the game control device 100 can end the transmission of the control signal and the timing signal when the customer wait state (FIG. 10, step A3212) is entered. As a result, the power consumption while waiting for customers can be reduced. Of course, even while waiting for customers, it is possible to transmit control signals and timing signals as in the case of playing a game.

The RAM 111c forming the gaming microcomputer 111 stores the information on the rotational speed and the timing information associated with the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 as described above. Therefore, the gaming microcomputer 111 can appropriately select the information on the rotational speed and the timing information based on the state of the gaming machine 10 and transmit the control signal and the timing signal.

The gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit a control signal and a timing signal in association with the production control command transmitted to the production control device 300, and rotates the rotary stage 810 in the forward direction or the reverse direction depending on the content of the production. You can also

As shown in FIG. 51, in the special figure game process of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, for example, the movable body control process (step A2619) is executed after the symbol variation control process. In the movable body control process (step A2619), the game control device 100 determines the state of the gaming machine 10 (waiting for a customer, playing a game, right hitting state, etc.), and based on the state, sends a control signal and a timing signal. Send.

The state of the game machine 10 can be identified by various commands transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Therefore, the effect control device 300 can also control the rotary stage motor 143 and the valve solenoid 144. The effect control device 300 can control the rotary stage motor 143 and the valve solenoid 144 as the board effect device 44. That is, the effect control device 300 can transmit the control signal and the timing signal based on various commands transmitted from the game control device 100. As a result, the game control device 100 does not transmit the control signal and the timing signal, so that the processing load of the game control device 100 can be reduced accordingly.

By the way, the game control device 100 (and the effect control device 300) starts the variable display game on the display device 41 when the game ball is won at the starting winning opening 36. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 44, 45, and 46, the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810) is visible to the player. Therefore, the player may pay attention to the behavior of the game ball rolling on the rotation stage 810 and the tray portion 801, and may not pay attention to the variable display game.

Therefore, it is preferable to set the duration (that is, the variation time) of the special figure variation display game to be approximately the same as the cycle of flowing down from the rotary stage 810 (the guiding groove 807) toward the starting winning opening 36. As a result, the state in which the flow of the game balls from the rotary stage 810 starts with the end of the variable display game is repeated, so that the display device 41 and the rotary unit that display the special figure variable display game can be alternately focused and rotated. It is possible to avoid the situation where you only pay attention to the unit.

For example, assuming that the cycle of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval at which the sluice valve 820 is opened is 8 seconds as described above, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the cutout portion 812 toward the starting winning opening 36 is 8 seconds. Since it is second, it is preferable that the variable display game starts with the winning of the game ball and the duration thereof is about 8 seconds. Further, assuming that the cycle of the rotary stage 810 is 40 seconds and the time interval at which the sluice valve 820 is opened is 3 seconds as described above, the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the cutout portion 812 toward the starting winning opening 36 is 24. Since it is second, it is preferable that the variable display game starts with the winning of the game ball and the duration thereof is about 24 seconds.

In addition to the above, the duration (variation time) of the special figure variation display game may be longer or shorter than the cycle in which the game ball flows down from the cutout portion 812 toward the starting winning opening 36, It may be longer than the cycle of the rotary stage 810. The duration of the variable display game may be the same as the product of the [predetermined coefficient] and the [cycle of the rotary stage 810], or may be longer or shorter than that. Here, the [predetermined coefficient] is “N”=4 when the timer interrupt period Nms=4 ms of the CPU 11a (FIG. 50) or the opening time Mms=100 ms in the special variation winning device 39 such as a small hit. , Then “M”=100 can be used.

Further, a first proximity switch 72a (FIG. 45, FIG. 50) for detecting the game ball is attached at any position of the warp passage 40e, and when the game ball passes through the first proximity switch 72a, the display device 41 displays, The count number of the game balls that have passed through the first proximity switch 72a is displayed, and when the count number exceeds the set count value, it becomes zero and becomes ready to count again, and then the game ball to the starting winning opening 36. In the hold change notice effect (may be applied continuously for one or more) using the hold display generated by the prize winning, the notice effect having higher expectation (reliability) than usual may be performed. Or, if the count number exceeds the set count value, it is expected that the fluctuation time of the variable display game related to hold (starting memory) will be lengthened or that the special figure variable display game currently being executed (the fluctuation) will be a big hit. It is possible to cause a player to expect the player to pay attention to the display device 41 by causing a high-quality effect (here, a zone effect) to appear.

The zone effect is, for example, performed by the entire display device 41, and is an effect in which the background color is different from the normal color (for example, blue) (for example, red), and the expectation of a big hit is higher than the normal case. Set it to a high degree. When the count number exceeds the set count value, the zone effect may be executed by changing the effect already set in the variable effect setting process (FIG. 29, B2006) (between B0014 and B0017 of the main process). Such processing steps may be provided).

It should be noted that the zone effect may be executed as the look-ahead zone effect when the count number exceeds the set count value and a hold with a high expectation of a big hit occurs after that, instead of the zone effect for the variation. The prefetch zone effect can be set in the prefetch symbol type command process (B1214) and the prefetch variable type command process (B1216) of FIG. In addition, although a hold with a high degree of expectation has already occurred, it is possible to have a configuration in which the hold change notice effect related to the hold is not performed (a hold change notice effect with a high degree of expectation). When the value is exceeded, the look-ahead zone effect related to the hold may be immediately executed, and at that time, the hold change notice effect related to the hold may be executed (may not be executed). The zone effect can be ended when the hold is exhausted.

The first proximity switch 72a may detect the game ball when the game ball passes through the first proximity switch 72a, for example, like the specific area switch 72, and the second proximity switch 72b, the third proximity switch 72c, and the fourth proximity switch 72c described later. The same applies to the proximity switch 72d.

It should be noted that the effect control device 300 executes the pending change notice effect based on the look-ahead symbol system command processing (B1214) and the look-ahead variable system command processing (B1216), and the hold display corresponding to the starting memory is a normal color (white). ) Is a notice effect that changes from () to different colors (for example, blue, green, red).

The control of the effect can be performed by the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 (see later). By performing such an effect, both the display device 41 and the rotating body unit 800 that display the variable display game can be watched, and a state where only the rotating body unit 800 is watched can be avoided. The signal of the first proximity switch 72a or the like may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such an effect without the intervention of the game control device 100.

On the other hand, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is the normal gaming state and the game balls are held in all of the cutout portions 812 of the rotary stage 810, the player stops (stops the game balls). It is possible to do it. On the other hand, as described above, all the game balls introduced into the game area 32 do not flow down to the rotating body unit 800, but do not pass through the lower left area of the game area 32, that is, the rotating body unit 800 (partly It may jump up from the area and ride on the rotary stage 810), and flow down to the area where the starting winning opening 36 can be won.

Therefore, when it is detected that the game ball is located at a specific position in the lower left area of the game area 32, the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41 may be used to perform an effect of promoting the continuation of the game ball. It is suitable.

For example, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35 (winning area), or the second proximity switch 72b (third detection) which is arranged at any position on the left side of the game area 32 and lower than the inflow opening 40a. When the means (FIG. 44, FIG. 50) detects a game ball, a predetermined count value (initial value) is displayed (lighted) in the upper performance unit 40c and the count value is counted down at a predetermined time interval, When the game ball again detects the game ball in the area during the countdown, the count value returns to the initial value, the countdown is started again, and a mini game is executed to prevent the count value from becoming zero.

On the other hand, the display device 41 displays a message prompting the player to launch a game ball so that the count value does not become zero, and when the mini game is successfully continued for a predetermined time, the display device 41 has a higher expectation than usual. A high pending change notice effect (other effects with high expectations may be given) or an effect suggesting a probability setting value is performed.

Here, the “preferred change notice effect with higher expectation than usual” is, for example, an effect in which the expectation degree indicated by the hold display is increased in multiple stages by repeating the success of the above-mentioned mini game (for example, The color of the hold display can be changed from one step (blue→red) to blue→green→red). This makes it possible to focus on the display device 41 and prevent hitting. At that time, it is possible not to apply the effect to the hold corresponding to the outlier, and to increase the contrast of the expectation level for the hold of the outfall and the hold of the big hit. As a result, the display device 41 can be focused and the effect of preventing hitting can be enhanced. Of course, if the mini-game fails, or if the execution is stopped midway, the expectation level indicated by the hold display returns.

In addition, as “another high-effect production”, for example, a group of characters such as fish and animals move in one direction in a special figure variation display game started after succeeding in continuing a mini game for a predetermined time. It is possible to execute the group notice effect and the zone effect which perform the display. Further, when the mini game is successfully continued for a predetermined time (in the special figure change display game being executed), the cut-in notice or the dialogue notice is executed on the display device 41 as “another high-effect production”. You may. In this way, the player becomes interested in continuing the mini game for a predetermined time period even with "another highly anticipated production".

Further, as the “effect that suggests the probability setting value”, for example, by displaying specific identification information in the outlier symbol of the special figure variation display game started after succeeding in continuing the mini game for a predetermined time. It is possible to suggest a probability set value (FIG. 29, B2012). For example, if the probability setting value is an odd number (1, 3, 5), "135" is set as the stop symbol, and if it is an even number (2, 4, 6), "246" is set as the stop symbol. Good. Also, any one of the symbols "1", "2", "3" ("2", "4", "6") of "135" ("246") with a predetermined probability (for example, 5%) Is displayed larger than the other two. Then, it may be suggested with a high probability (for example, 90%) that the numerical value related to the symbol is the probability setting value. Alternatively, as the “effect that suggests the probability setting value”, a specific character image appears on the display device 41 and is specified by the color of the character image as an effect that is independent of the effect related to the special figure variation display game being executed. It may be suggested that the probability of the probability setting value of is higher than that of other probability setting values. In this way, since the "effect that suggests the probability setting value" is a privilege, the player becomes interested in continuing the mini game for a predetermined time.

Specifically, the control of the effect is started, for example, when the game control device 100 does not input a detection signal for a predetermined time from any switch that detects a game ball such as the gate switch 34a. Alternatively, the winning opening switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b are detected when a game ball is detected. At this time, the game control device 100 sends a count value command (initial value) for notifying the count value (initial value) and performing a display prompting continuation of firing to the effect control device 300, and also causes the countdown at a predetermined time interval. A count value command informing the counted value is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

Then, when the detection signal is input from the winning opening switch 35a or the second proximity switch 72b before the count value becomes zero, the game control device 100 transmits a count value command (initial value) to the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 displays the count value on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) in response to the count value command, and performs a display on the display device 41 to urge the player to continue to shoot the game ball (it may not be performed). Then, when the duration of the mini game exceeds a predetermined time, the game control device 100 transmits a predetermined command to the effect control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 that has received the predetermined command performs a pending change notice effect having a higher expectation (reliability) than usual by using the pending display generated thereafter, or an effect that suggests a probability setting value. I do. By performing such an effect, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting down.

The signals of the first proximity switch 72a and the second proximity switch 72b may be directly input to the effect control device 300 to execute such a mini game and effect without the intervention of the game control device 100.

When the winning opening switch 35a and the second proximity switch 72b detect a game ball, some effect image may be displayed on the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device) or the display device 41, or a sound effect is output from the speaker 19. You may choose to put it out. As the effect image, in the case of the upper effect unit 40c (dot display device), for example, a mode in which the displayed count value is surrounded by an explosion outline (speech bubble) for a predetermined time can be applied. Further, in the case of the display device 41, a mode in which a moving image in which transparent (or semi-transparent) bubbles climb from the bottom to the top is displayed can be applied.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is also preferable to monitor the state in which the game ball is held on the rotary stage 810 and display it on the display device 41 so that the player can gaze at the display device 41. For example, each notch 812 is provided with a fifth proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch, etc.), the fifth proximity switch is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 is also provided. A command indicating that the valve solenoid 144 (FIG. 50) has been driven is input to the game control device 100. Then, the effect control device 300 displays an image imitating the rotary stage 810 in a screen corner of the display device 41 or in an area different from the variable display area, the hold display area, and the effect display area, and the game in each cutout portion 812. The presence/absence of a ball and the open/closed state of the gate valve 820 may be displayed.

For example, in the display device 41, a sixth proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch or the like) for detecting a game ball passing through the guide rib 804 is provided, and in the effect control device 300, the sixth proximity switch is a game. Whenever the ball is detected, the game ball displays a video on the screen which enters the rotary stage 810 from the guide rib 804, and when the fifth proximity switch detects the game ball, the game ball enters the corresponding notch 812 on the screen. The state is displayed so that the state in which the game ball is actually held in the cutout portion 812 can be reflected on the screen. It should be noted that when the ball launching device operates or the player touches the ball launching device (when a touch switch signal is detected), it may be displayed on the screen that the gaming ball enters the rotary stage 810 from the guide rib 804. .. With these configurations, the player can grasp the situation of the rotary stage 810 on the display device 41 without looking at the rotary stage 810.

It should be noted that regardless of whether the game ball is actually detected by the fifth proximity switch or the sixth proximity switch, a predetermined timing such as the start of the left-handed state (or the display of the left-handed instruction display for instructing the left-handed operation) In addition, a state in which the game ball enters the rotating stage 810 may be displayed on the display device 41 as a moving image (may be a still image), and the player may be prompted to let the game ball flow down to the rotating stage 810.

Further, a role may be given to the cutout portion 812 on the display. For example, when a game ball enters the cutout portion 812, the player is given effect points, three of the five cutout portions 812 have 1 point, one of the remaining two has 5 points, and the other has 10 points. Is given. The effect points are, for example, points necessary for executing the above-mentioned mini game, and 100 points are consumed per one mini game, for example. In this way, by giving the player the effect points for the mini game, it is possible to give the rotating stage 810 an incentive to cause the game balls to flow down one after another. The production control device 300 can perform the above-described control of point giving (FIG. 23: B0012) and its display (FIG. 29: B2002, B2004, B2007). Here, it is preferable that the effect control device 300 displays the current number of points and the number of points consumed in the mini game at a position where they do not overlap with other displays on the display device 41.

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, most of the game balls flowing down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) wins the starting winning opening 36, but as described above, it collides with another game ball and wins. There are times when you don't. Moreover, not only the game ball that has flowed down from the extending portion 806 (guide groove 807) but also the other game ball may win the starting winning opening 36. Therefore, the guide groove 807 is also provided with a seventh proximity switch (not shown, similar to the first proximity switch or the like), the seventh proximity switch is electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the starting opening 1 switch 36a is connected. A command corresponding to the detection is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Then, the effect control device 300 compares the number of times the seventh proximity switch detects the game ball and the number of times the start opening 1 switch 36a detects at each predetermined time (for example, 40 seconds and 96 seconds described above), and starts the operation. When the mouth 1 switch 36a detects the game ball more often, for example, the display device 41 displays a character such as "Good condition, let's go as it is!" (for example, for about 5 seconds), On the contrary, when the number is small, characters such as "Next is all right!" may be displayed (for example, displayed for about 5 seconds or not displayed). In this way, it is possible to prevent hitting and stopping by displaying a message that encourages the player.

In addition, by electrically connecting the fifth proximity switch, the sixth proximity switch, and the seventh proximity switch to the game control device 100, a command indicating that the fifth proximity switch has been detected from the game control device 100 is issued. It may be sent to the performance control device 300.

[First Modification]
FIG. 52A is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of a rotary unit 800 that constitutes a first modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the first modification, a component that changes the rolling direction of the game ball in the rotating body unit 800 is added. As shown in FIG. 52, one or a plurality of obstacle nails 830 (rolling direction conversion members) are implanted (arranged) at a position different from the position where the cutout portion 812 of the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 is arranged. ) Has been. By implanting the obstacle nail 830 in the rotary stage 810, the game ball is temporarily retained in the rotary stage 810, and the rolling direction of the game ball flowing down from the warp passage 40e to the rotary stage 810 is irregularly changed. The interest can be improved.

When one obstacle nail 830 is to be implanted, it can be implanted at any position other than the cutout portion 812 of the rotary stage 810. Further, when a plurality of obstacle nails 830 are planted, it is desirable that the distance between adjacent nails 830 be larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball can roll toward the center of the rotary stage 810, and the game ball at the center can also roll toward the cutout portion 812 or the tray portion 801, and the entire rotary stage 810 plays the game. The ball can be rolled irregularly.

Further, when a plurality of obstacle nails 830 are planted, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the nails 830 may be planted so that the arrangement thereof has the same central symmetry as the cutout portion 812. In FIG. 52, since the five cutouts 812 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (5-fold symmetry), the disposition manner of the obstacle nail 830 is also planted so as to be 5-fold symmetric (5-pointed star shape). Has been done. Thereby, the game ball can be directed to any of the cutouts 812 with the same probability. Needless to say, the obstruction nails 830 may be arranged in a circle concentric with the rotary stage 810 (a circle having a radius smaller than the radius of the rotary stage 810) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801, it is preferable to dispose a bounce member 840 (for example, a sling shot, flipper) that bounces down the game ball toward the rotary stage 810. The bounce member 840 is a member that mechanically (or electrically) operates when it receives a game ball and bounces the game ball toward the upper side of the inclined rolling surface 802 or rolling surface 811 (the direction away from the game area 32). Is.

As a mode of flipping up the game ball, like a bounce member 840 shown on the left side of FIG. 52, the tray part 801 is directly directed toward the rotary stage 810 by receiving the game ball rolling at a right angle toward the game area 32. There is a way to bounce. Further, like a bounce member 840 shown on the right side of FIG. 52, it receives a game ball that rolls at a shallow angle toward the game area 32, bounces upward toward the rolling surface 802 of the tray portion 801, and then the game. There is a mode in which the sphere can be reflected by the wall portions 803A, 803B, 803C and roll toward the rotary stage 810. In any case, since the game ball rolling on the rotary stage 810 is directed toward the rotary stage 810 again, the game ball is temporarily retained in the tray portion 801 or the rotary stage 810, and the cutout portion 812 is used for the game. The expectation of holding the ball can be increased.

In the first modification, both the obstacle nail 830 and the bounce member 840 are arranged in the rotating body unit 800, but only one of them may be arranged.

[Second Modification]
FIG. 52B is a plan view (cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 44) of a rotating body unit 800 that constitutes a second modified example of the gaming machine of the third embodiment. In the second modified example, instead of the obstacle nail 830 of the first modified example, a second rotary stage 890 that rotates coaxially with the rotary stage 810 is provided in the center of the rotary stage 810. The rotary stage 810 is hollowed out in a cylindrical shape, and the second rotary stage 890 is arranged in the hollowed-out portion. The second rotary stage 890 is arranged so as to be slightly exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Further, on the second rotation stage 890, a plurality of second cutout portions 891 (second holding portions) capable of accommodating game balls are arranged side by side (three in FIG. 52B) in the circumferential direction.

The opening of the second cutout portion 891 in the radial direction is opened, and the bottom surface of the second cutout portion 891 forms substantially the same plane as the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Therefore, the game ball rolling on the rotary stage 810 easily enters and is retained in the second cutout portion 891. On the other hand, since there is no member for closing the radial opening in the second cutout 891, when the radial opening of the second cutout 891 faces the game area 32 side (downward). When tilted), the game ball held in the second cutout portion 891 can be easily separated from the radial opening of the second cutout portion 891. By applying this second rotary stage 890, it is possible to improve the interest in the rolling direction of the game ball.

The rotation direction of the second rotary stage 890 is preferably opposite to that of the rotary stage 810 (may be the same direction). The rotation cycle of the second rotation stage 890 may be synchronized with the rotation cycle of the rotation stage 810. The rotation cycle of the second rotation stage 890 may be half the rotation cycle of the rotation stage 810, or may be asynchronous and an arbitrary rotation cycle may be applied.

The second rotary stage 890 can be driven by a motor different from the rotary stage 810, or can be driven by the same motor (rotary stage motor 143) as the rotary stage 810. When the second rotary stage 890 is driven by the same motor as the rotary stage 810, the rotary stage 810 and the second rotary stage 890 are mechanically coupled by a gear, and by appropriately designing the gear ratio, The rotation ratio of the rotary stage 810 and the second rotary stage 890 can be appropriately designed.

[Third Modification]
FIG. 53 is a perspective view of a third modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 54 is a schematic diagram of a distribution device 850 that constitutes a third modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the third modification, the distribution device 850 is arranged at a position in the middle of the warp passage 40e. The distribution device 850 includes a first branch flow path 851 that branches at an intermediate position of the warp passage 40e, and a flow path of the game balls that flow down into the warp passage 40e and are directed to the rotary stage 810. The first switching valve 853 (second valve) that can switch between the first and second branch flow paths 851 and the third proximity switch 72c (first detection means, which detects the game ball in the warp passage 40e, 50 and 54). The outlet 852 (FIG. 53) of the first branch flow path 851 communicates with the game area 32 (the game area 32 not passing through the rotary unit 800). By applying this distribution device 850, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 54( a ), the first switching valve 853 normally has a biasing means (spring or the like) so that the portion of the warp passage 40 e upstream of the first switching valve 853 communicates with the rotary stage 810. ) Is rotated by the urging force. Then, each time the third proximity switch 72c detects a predetermined number of game balls, the valve solenoid 145 (FIG. 50) is driven to rotate the first switching valve 853 in the opposite direction, and FIG. 54(b). As shown in, the portion of the warp passage 40e upstream of the first switching valve 853 communicates with the first branch flow passage 851 (game area 32). Further, when the third proximity switch 72c next detects a game ball flowing down to the warp passage 40e, the driving of the valve solenoid 145 is stopped and the first switching valve 853 is returned to the original position by the urging force of the urging means (not shown). It is designed to rotate. The rotation direction of the first switching valve 853 by the urging force of the urging means (not shown) and the rotation direction of the first switching valve 853 by the driving force of the valve solenoid 145 may be opposite to each other.

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the third proximity switch 72c, returns to zero every time the count reaches a set count value, and becomes a countable state again, and the first switching A drive signal is transmitted to the valve solenoid 145 (FIG. 50) that drives the valve 853 (second valve), and the drive signal is stopped when the detection signal is input next (FIG. 50). Alternatively, the distribution device 850 may include a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit/stop the drive signal similarly to the game control device 100. In addition, by changing the set count value, the distribution ratio of the game balls in the distribution device 850 can be arbitrarily changed. In any case, according to the third modification, it is possible to adjust so that the game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 do not increase too much.

In addition, without providing the third proximity switch 72c (without counting the game balls), the first switching valve 853 is rotated at a predetermined cycle and maintained for a certain period, and the flow path of the game balls is first branched. The flow path 851 may be switched to. Even in this way, the number of game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 can be adjusted.

[Fourth Modification]
FIG. 55 is a front view of a fourth modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram of a first distribution unit 860 (distribution unit) that constitutes a fourth modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the fourth modified example, the first distribution unit 860 for distributing whether or not to distribute the game balls to the rotating body unit 800 is arranged. The first distribution unit 860 is arranged at a position upstream of the game ball with respect to the inflow port 40a of the game area 32.

The first sorting unit 860 is a unit main body 861, an inlet 862 arranged at the upper part of the unit main body 861 for introducing a game ball, and a discharge port arranged at the lower part of the unit main body 861 for discharging the game ball to the game area 32 again. 863, and a second intake passage 864 extending from the unit main body 861 and communicating with the inlet 40a (rotating body unit 800).

Here, an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted at a position above the introduction port 862 of the game area 32, but the game ball flowing down to the left side of the game area 32 has an arbitrary ratio (probability density). Is the maximum, for example, 50%), and is planted so as to flow down to the inlet 862.

The second intake passage 864 communicates the inlet 862 with the inlet 40a. The second branch channel 865 branches from a position in the unit main body 861 which is in the middle of the second intake channel 864, and the second branch channel 865 communicates with the discharge port 863. In addition, at the branch position of the second intake passage 864 and the second branch passage 865, the passage of the game ball flowing down from the inlet 862 is the inlet 40a (the downstream portion of the second intake passage 864 from the branch position). ), and a second switching valve 866 (third valve) that can be switched between a flow path that flows down toward the second branch flow path 865 and a flow path that flows down toward the second branch flow path 865. Further, a fourth proximity switch 72d (second detection means, FIG. 50) for detecting the game ball flowing down to the second intake passage 864 is attached to the second intake passage 864.

As shown in FIG. 56( a ), the second switching valve 866 is normally arranged so that a portion of the second intake passage 864 upstream of the second switching valve 866 communicates with the second branch passage 865. Has been done. And, each time the fourth proximity switch 72d detects a predetermined number of game balls, the fourth proximity switch 72d is driven, and as shown in FIG. 56(b), the portion upstream of the second switching valve 866 of the second intake passage 864. Is communicated with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56( b ), the portion of the second intake passage 864 that is normally upstream of the second switching valve 866 is arranged so as to communicate with the inlet 40 a (rotary unit 800 ). May be. Then, the fourth proximity switch 72d is driven each time a predetermined number of game balls are detected, and as shown in FIG. 56(b), a portion of the second intake passage 864 upstream of the second switching valve 866. May communicate with the second branch flow channel 865.

The game control device 100 counts the number of detection signals input from the fourth proximity switch 72d, returns to zero each time the count reaches a set count value, and becomes a state in which counting is possible again and the second switching. A drive signal is transmitted to the valve solenoid 146 (FIG. 50) that drives the valve 866 (third valve), and when the detection signal is input next, the drive signal is stopped (FIG. 50). Alternatively, the first distribution unit 860 may include a counter (not shown), and the counter (not shown) may transmit/stop the drive signal similarly to the game control device 100. It should be noted that by changing the set count value, it is possible to arbitrarily change the distribution ratio of the game balls in the first distribution unit 860.

In addition, without providing the fourth proximity switch 72d (without counting the game balls), the first switching valve 853 is rotated at a predetermined cycle and maintained for a certain period of time, whereby the flow path of the game balls is set to the second. The branch channel 865 may be switched to. Even in this way, the number of game balls flowing down to the inflow port 40a and thus the rotary stage 810 can be adjusted.

[Fifth Modification]
FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram of a second distribution unit 870 (distribution unit) that constitutes a fifth modified example of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a schematic diagram showing an operation of distributing game balls by the second distributing unit 870. In the fifth modified example, the second distribution unit 870 that distributes whether or not to distribute the game balls to the rotating body unit 800 is arranged at the same position as the first distribution unit 860 of the fourth modified example, but the distribution is performed by the machine. Can be done on a regular basis.

The second distribution unit 870 of the fifth modified example communicates with the inlet 872 into which the game ball is introduced, the two outlets 873 from which the game ball is discharged, and the inlet 872, and branches downward from the middle. A Y-shaped channel 874 (third branch channel) that communicates with the two outlets 873, and a switching operation each time a game ball is placed at the branch position of the Y-shaped channel 874 and receives two game outlets 873. It is provided with a plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 including a third switching valve 875 that alternately causes the game balls to flow downward.

The distribution mechanism 871 is connected in series in such a manner that one outlet 873 of the distribution mechanism 871 in the front stage communicates with the inlet 872 of the distribution mechanism 871 in the rear stage. Then, at least one of the outlets 873 (not communicating with the inlet 872) that is the end of the plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 communicates with the inflow port 40a (rotating body unit 800). In FIG. 57, the distribution mechanism 871 is connected in a 4-stage series (distribution mechanisms 871A, 871B, 871C, 871D). The number of stages of the distribution mechanism 871 is arbitrary, and is appropriately adjusted according to the ratio of the game balls to be flown into the inflow port 40a with respect to the launched game balls (depending on the design value of the start value S). Further, the smaller the number of stages of the distribution mechanism 871 (especially if it is one stage), the more advantageous in terms of cost.

The operation of the distribution mechanism 871 will be described with reference to FIG. The third switching valve 875 (switching valve) that configures the distribution mechanism 871 includes a rotating member 876 and a stopper portion 883 that abuts on the rotating member 876 to restrict the rotation of the rotating member 876, and the Y-shaped flow path 874. It is arranged at the branch position (Fig. 57).

The rotating member 876 has an inverted T shape in which the T shape is upside down, and is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the horizontal bar portion and the longitudinal direction of the vertical bar portion at the joining position of the inverted T-shaped horizontal bar portion and the vertical bar portion. It has a rotating shaft 880 extending in any direction. The rotating member 876 includes an upright portion 877 forming an inverted T-shaped vertical rod portion, a right bottom portion 878 forming a portion of the inverted T-shaped horizontal rod portion on the right side of the rotation shaft 880, and an inverted T-shaped portion. And a left bottom portion 879 forming a portion of the horizontal bar portion on the left side of the rotation shaft 880.

The stopper member 883 is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879. That is, as shown in FIG. 58A, when the rotating member 876 rotates clockwise, the right bottom portion 878 contacts the stopper member 883, and at this time, the upright portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined rightward and upward from the rotating shaft 880. The bottom portion 879 is arranged so as to be inclined to the upper left side from the rotation shaft 880. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 58B, when the rotating member 876 rotates counterclockwise, the left bottom portion 879 abuts on the stopper member 883, and at this time, the standing portion 877 inclines to the upper left side from the rotating shaft 880. The arrangement is such that the right bottom portion 878 is inclined rightward and upward from the rotation shaft 880.

Here, in FIG. 58A or FIG. 58B, the center of gravity of the upright portion 877 and the center of gravity of the integrated body (bottom portion) including the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 are on opposite sides of the rotating shaft 880. To do. Therefore, the moment (torque) that the standing portion 877 gives to the rotating shaft 880 due to gravity and the moment (torque) that the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 give to the rotating shaft 880 due to gravity are in opposite directions. However, the moment related to the upright portion 877 is designed to be larger than the moment related to the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879. Therefore, as long as the game ball does not come into contact, the state of FIG. 58(a) or FIG. 58(b) is stably maintained.

Therefore, when the rotating member 876 is released, the right bottom portion 878 is in contact with the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. 58A, or the left bottom portion 879 is in contact with the stopper member 883 as shown in FIG. 58B. In either of the contacted states, the standing portion 877 hardly stands still in a state of standing vertically (the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879 are kept horizontal). Further, even if the upright portion 877 stands still in a vertically standing state, a game ball contacts the rotating member 876 to rotate the rotating member 876 in either direction, so that the right bottom portion 878 or the left bottom portion 879 is rotated. Is in contact with the stopper member 883.

The side surface on the right bottom portion 878 side of the standing portion 877 and the upper surface of the right bottom portion 878 form a right receiving portion 881 that receives a game ball. It is a left receiving portion 882 for receiving. Therefore, the game ball flowing down from the introduction port 872 is temporarily held by the right receiving portion 881 or the left receiving portion 882.

As shown in FIG. 58A, when the left receiving portion 882 receives and temporarily holds the game ball, the game ball is arranged at a position biased to the left bottom portion 879 side with respect to the rotation shaft 880. At this time, the moment that the game ball gives to the rotating shaft 880 by the gravity and the moment that the rotating member 876 gives to the rotating shaft 880 (the difference between the moment of the upright portion 877 and the bottom moment composed of the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879) is Although the directions are opposite to each other, the moment related to the game ball is larger than the moment related to the rotating member 876. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 58B, the rotating member 876 rotates counterclockwise to the left bottom portion 879 side while holding the game ball, and the left bottom portion 879 contacts the stopper member 883. At this time, the left bottom portion 879 is arranged so as to be inclined leftward and downward from the rotation shaft 880, so that the game ball rolls on the left bottom portion 879 toward the tip of the left bottom portion 879 and is separated from the rotation member 876 and one of the discharge ports is provided. Run down towards 873. Further, the upright portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined to the upper left side from the rotation shaft 880. As described above, since the moment that the standing portion 877 gives to the rotating shaft 880 is larger than the moment that the bottom portion (the right bottom portion 878 and the left bottom portion 879) gives to the rotating shaft 880, after the game ball separates from the rotating member 876. Also, the left bottom portion 879 is kept in contact with the stopper member 883, and the right receiving portion 881 can receive the next game ball.

Then, when the next game ball flows down from the introduction port 872, the right receiving portion 881 receives the game ball and temporarily holds it, as shown in FIG. 58B. At this time, as shown in FIG. 58( b ), in the arrangement in which the right receiving portion 881 receives the game ball, the game ball is arranged at a position closer to the right bottom portion 878 than the rotation shaft 880. In this case as well, for the same reason as above, as shown in FIG. 58A, the rotating member 876 rotates to the right bottom portion 878 side while holding the game ball, and the right bottom portion 878 contacts the stopper member 883. At this time, since the right bottom portion 878 is inclined downward to the right from the rotation shaft 880, the game ball rolls on the right bottom portion 878 toward the tip of the right bottom portion 878 and separates from the rotation member 876 and the other discharge port. Run down towards 873. Further, the standing portion 877 is arranged so as to be inclined rightward and upward from the rotation shaft 880. For the same reason as above, even after the game ball is separated from the rotating member 876, the right bottom portion 878 remains in contact with the stopper member 883, and the left receiving portion 882 can receive the next game ball. ..

As described above, the third switching valve 875 alternately turns in the opposite direction each time the game ball is received, so that the game ball can be alternately distributed toward the one discharge port 873 and the other discharge port 873. it can.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the case of introducing game balls from the inlet 872A of the distribution mechanism 871A on the most upstream side, the distribution in the case of introducing the 1st to 17th game balls in that order Think As shown in FIG. 57, assuming that all the third switching valves 875 are tilted to the left in the initial state, odd-numbered game balls are sorted toward the right-side discharge port 873 in the first-stage sorting mechanism 871A. The even-numbered game balls are sorted toward the left outlet 873.

In the distribution mechanism 871 of the second stage, the 1st, 5th, 9th, 13th, and 17th game balls are distributed toward the discharge port 873 on the right side, and the 3rd, 7th, 11th, and 15th The game balls are sorted toward the left outlet 873.

In the distribution mechanism 871 in the third stage, the first, ninth, and 17th game balls are distributed toward the right outlet 873, and the fifth and 13th game balls are distributed toward the left outlet 873. Be done.

In the distribution mechanism 871 of the fourth stage, the first and 17th game balls are distributed toward the right outlet 873, and the ninth game ball is distributed toward the left outlet 873. When the 16th game ball is distributed here, the third switching valve 875 is returned to the initial state, and the 17th game ball is distributed the same as the 1st game ball. Therefore, the second distribution unit 870 repeats the operation of distributing the game balls with 16 pieces as one cycle.

Therefore, as shown in the following (1) to (9), the second distribution unit 870 appropriately selects the discharge port 873 that communicates with the inflow port 40a, thereby playing the game at a ratio of 1/16 to 15/16. The sphere can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800.

(1): When one of the outlets 873D (all of which is the end) of the distribution mechanism 871D in the fourth stage is communicated with the inlet 40a, a ratio of one in sixteen, that is, 1/16 The game ball can be made to flow toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of. The remaining outlets 873A, 873B, 873C, 873D are opened to the game area 32 (the area where the game ball does not flow down to the inflow port 40a) (the same applies hereinafter).

(2): Both outlets 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, or the opened outlet 873C (terminating) of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C is introduced into the inlet. When communicating with 40a, the game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotary unit 800 at a ratio of 2 to 16, that is, a ratio of 2/16.

(3): When one of the outlets 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D and the opened outlet 873C of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C are communicated with the inflow port 40a, a ratio of three to sixteen, that is, The game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 3/16.

(4): The opened discharge port 873B (which is the end) of the distribution mechanism 871B of the second stage is communicated with the inflow port 40a, or the discharged discharge ports 873C and 4 of the distribution mechanism 871C of the third stage are opened. When both the outlets 873D of the stage distribution mechanism 871D are communicated with the inflow port 40a, the game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of four to 16, that is, a ratio of 4/16. it can.

(5): When the opened discharge port 873B of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B and one discharge port 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, a ratio of 5 to 16 is obtained, that is, The game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 5/16.

(6): The outlet 873B at the end of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B, both the outlet 873C opened at the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C or the outlet 873D at the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D, By communicating with the inflow port 40a, the game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 6 to 16, that is, a ratio of 6/16.

(7): The open outlet 873B of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B, the open outlet 873C of the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C, and one outlet 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D. When communicating with the inflow port 40a, the game balls can be made to flow down toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of 7 out of 16, that is, 7/16.

(8): The open outlet 873A (the terminal end) of the first-stage sorting mechanism 871A is communicated with the inflow port 40a, or the opened outlet 873B of the second-stage sorting mechanism 871B, When the discharge port 873C opened in the third-stage sorting mechanism 871C and both discharge ports 873D of the fourth-stage sorting mechanism 871D are communicated with the inlet 40a, a ratio of 8 to 16 is obtained, that is, 8/16. The game ball can be made to flow toward the rotating body unit 800 at a ratio of.

(9): In the above (1) to (7), when the opened discharge port 873A of the first-stage sorting mechanism 871A is further communicated with each other, the game balls are rotator unit at a ratio of 9/16 to 15/16, respectively. It can be made to flow toward 800.

In the fourth modified example, the distribution mechanism 871 is connected in four stages in series, but it may be in only one stage, or in two-stage series, three-stage series, or even five or more stages in series. In the distribution unit 860 of the third modification, the distribution mechanism (the second switching valve 866) has one stage, but a mode in which a plurality of stages are connected in series as in the fourth modification can also be applied.

[Probability density distribution of start value S]
FIG. 59 is a graph comparing the probability density distribution of the start value S of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment with the probability density distribution of the start value S of the conventional gaming machine. For example, in a gaming machine that shoots 100 game balls per minute, the start value S can be defined as the number of times the special symbol fluctuates when the 100 game balls are shot (the number of executions of the special figure variation display game), and the start prize It is synonymous with the number of times a game ball wins in the mouth 36. Therefore, for example, when the game balls are continuously fired and the special symbol changes 6.25 times per minute, the start value S becomes 6.25 times/minute.

On the other hand, in the conventional gaming machine, the game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills planted in the game area 32, and some of the game balls enter the start winning opening 36. However, the rolling direction of the game ball changes irregularly due to obstacle nails and windmills.

Therefore, the start value S has a constant probability density (probability=1) at the start value S in the coordinate system with the horizontal axis representing the random variable (start value S) and the vertical axis representing the probability density, and is a value other than that. It can be defined as a point on the probability density curve where the value is the center of the random variable and the probability density has a peak value, not the point on the delta function where the probability density becomes zero.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59, in the conventional gaming machine, for example, when the set start value (design value) is set to 6.25, the actually observed start value S is centered at 6.25. It will be observed with a probability on the probability density distribution curve (A) having a very wide distribution and a low peak value. In particular, in the probability density distribution curve (A), even if the start value S is 0 or 1, it has a constant probability density, so this becomes a slump of the start value S (becomes extremely small), and the game ball is started at the winning opening 36. It is difficult to make a stable prize.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the set start value is changed, as described above, the position of the horizontal axis of the probability density distribution curve (A) changes, but its peak value remains low, so the game hall ( It is difficult for the (hall) side to effectively change the start value S, and it is difficult for the player to experience the change in the start value S.

Further, in the conventional gaming machine, even if the probability setting value for setting the probability of a big hit or the like can be changed, since the start value S has a slump as described above, the change of the probability setting value also on the hall side. Is difficult to reflect as a change in the jackpot occurrence probability, and it is also difficult for a player to experience a change in the probability setting value as a change in the jackpot occurrence probability.

On the other hand, the third embodiment has a configuration in which a plurality of game balls held by the rotating body unit 800 (rotary stage 810) are periodically flown down toward the start winning opening 36, and the game balls are started winning. The mouth 36 almost certainly wins. Note that one minute or more of the game balls corresponding to the design start value S are supplied from the warp passage 40e to the rotating body unit 800 (rotating stage 810).

Therefore, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, for example, when the set start value is set to 6.25, the actually observed start value S has a narrow distribution centered at 6.25 and a peak value. Is a point on the high probability density distribution curve (B). Since the probability density distribution curve (B) has a high peak value, the frequency at which the game ball wins the starting winning opening 36 becomes extremely high near the start value S=6.25. Further, the probability density when the start value S is 0 or 1 is almost zero, and the slump does not substantially occur at the start value S.

Therefore, on the hole side, the start value S can be set low, and even in this case, the slump does not occur and the variation of the special symbol (variation display game) is almost surely executed, so that the decrease in the interest can be suppressed. it can. Further, since the degree of reflection in the change in the probability of occurrence of a big hit due to the change in the probability setting value is high, profit adjustment can be easily performed.

Further, in the third embodiment, since the start value S is stable, the rotating body unit 800 holds the game ball before winning, thereby mechanically holding the starting winning. Therefore, it is possible to omit the configuration (starting winning memory, starting memory) that electrically holds (memorizes) the winning prize generated when the game ball is won to the starting winning opening 36, or to reduce the maximum limit of holding. It is possible.

A case will be described where the set start value=6.25 is realized in the fourth modified example or the fifth modified example. 100 game balls are left-handedly shot per minute and flow down to the game area 32. The game balls are distributed by the implanted obstacle nails at an average probability of 1/2 (first distribution unit 860, second distribution unit). The start value S is set to (the unit 870), and if it is considered that the distributed game units flow down to the rotary stage at a ratio of 1 in 8 (probability), and the flowed down game balls almost win the starting winning opening 36. 100 pieces/minute)×(1/2)×(1/8)=6.25 pieces/minute. Here, in the fourth modification (first distribution unit 860), the set count value is set to 7 (the count number of the detection signal of the fourth proximity switch 72d is an integer from 0 to 7), and the fifth modification (second). In the distribution unit 870), by adopting the configuration of (2) above, it is possible to cause the game balls to flow down to the rotary stage 810 at a ratio (probability) of 1 in 8.

In addition, in the third embodiment, the rotation speed of the rotary stage 810 is changed, or the drive timing of the sluice valve 820 (valve solenoid 144) is changed (the rotation speed and the drive timing are changed in association with the change of the probability setting value). The setting start value can be easily changed. At this time, the probability density distribution curve (B) shown in FIG. 59 shifts in the horizontal axis direction while maintaining a high peak value. Therefore, the change in the set start value can be directly reflected as the change in the start value S.

Therefore, for example, with respect to the gaming machine 10 designed with a low start value S=5.2, a normal gaming state with a gaming machine designed with a general start value S=5.8 with the same payout rate (base) Although a difference occurs in the payout, the payout corresponding to the difference can be designed to be returned to the player as a special payout (prize ball due to a big hit or the like) (for example, the number of big hit rounds is increased). As a result, it is possible to provide a game-oriented gaming machine that is "sweet" and "attractive" to the player.

The spread of the distribution width of the probability density distribution curve (B) is mainly due to variations in the flow path of the game balls flowing down from the obstacle nail located upstream of the distribution unit (the first distribution unit 860 and the second distribution unit 870). It is considered that this is due to variations in the flow path of the game balls flowing down toward the starting winning opening 36 without passing through the cutout portion 812. In addition, when there is no distribution unit, it also results from variations in the flow path of the game balls that flow down from the obstacle nail arranged in the game area 32 upstream of the inflow port 40a toward the inflow port 40a. In this way, by giving a certain extent of the distribution width to the probability density distribution curve (B), not only a stable start value S can be realized, but also an accidental start winning can be caused, which makes the game interesting. Can be improved.

As described above, according to the third embodiment, the player can surely generate a certain number of fluctuations (variable display game) with a certain investment amount, and the start value S is stable on the maker side. Can be set low, and the profit adjustment can be easily performed by changing the probability setting value on the side of the game hall (hall).

[Operation/Effect of Third Embodiment]
According to the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment, the game area 32, the winning area (starting winning opening 36 and the like) arranged in the gaming area 32, and the winning of the game ball to the winning area (starting winning opening 36). It is provided with winning stabilizing means (induction means, rotating body unit 800) for stabilizing. For example, the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) can hold a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and the held game balls are directed to the winning area (starting winning opening 36 etc.). A guiding unit (rotating body unit 800) capable of repeatedly performing the guiding operation is provided. Alternatively, the winning stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) can retain a plurality of game balls that can flow down the game area 32, and guide the retained game balls toward the prize area (starting winning opening 36). The guide means (rotating body unit 800, obstacle nail 830, and rebound member 840) capable of repeatedly performing the above-described operation is provided. As a result, it is possible to stably enter the game ball into the winning area and enhance the interest of the game. As a result, the start value S can be always stabilized. Further, in the conventional game machine, it was not possible to fully enjoy the rolling of the game ball, but the game ball can be rolled by the prize stabilizing means (the guiding means, the rotating body unit 800) of the present embodiment. You can enjoy the situation and your interest will improve. In particular, this embodiment is directed to the game balls before winning the prize, and enjoy the rolling of the game balls before winning by the prize stabilizing means (guidance means, rotating body unit 800) immediately after starting the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

In the third embodiment, the winning area is the starting winning opening 36. This makes it possible to always stabilize the start value S related to the variation (variable display game) that occurs due to the winning of the winning a prize opening 36.

In the third embodiment, in the game area 32, a distribution unit (first distribution unit 860, second distribution unit 870) for allocating whether or not the game ball is introduced into the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is arranged. There is. Thereby, the start value S can be further stabilized.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can guide the game balls held in a predetermined cycle (for example, 8 seconds) toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) one by one. As a result, it is possible to carry out a variation of the symbol (variation display game) at equal intervals in time.

In the third embodiment, the duration (variation time) of the variable display game started by the winning of the game balls into the winning area (starting winning opening 36 etc.) is substantially the same as the above-mentioned cycle. As a result, both the variable display game and the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be made to pay attention, and a state in which only the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is gazing can be avoided.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) does not operate while waiting for customers. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption while waiting for customers.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) operates in the first launching mode (left hitting) in which the game balls can flow down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800), and the first shooting mode (left hitting). The operation is stopped in the second firing mode (right strike) different from (1). This avoids power consumption of the guiding means (rotating stage 810) during the second firing mode (right hitting), and when the number of holdings is maximum, the gaming ball held by the guiding means (rotating body unit 800). It is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily entering the winning area (starting winning opening 36).

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) is arranged so as to surround the rotary stage 810 around which the game ball supplied from the game area 32 rolls and the rotary stage 810, and flows down from the rotary stage 810. And a tray portion 801 that causes the game ball to flow down to the game area 32, and a plurality of holding portions (notch portions 812) that hold the game ball are arranged side by side in the circumferential direction on the periphery of the rotary stage 810. When the rotary stage 810 rotates, the portion 801 is sequentially communicated with the holding portion (notch portion 812), and the game balls held by the holding portion (notch portion 812) are placed in the winning area (starting winning opening 36). ), and a first valve (gate valve 820) that repeats the operation of closing and opening the inlet of the guide groove 807. Thereby, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be constructed with a simple structure.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (gate valve 820) opens the guide groove 807 when the guide groove 807 faces the holding portion (notch portion 812). As a result, the game ball held by the holding portion (notch portion 812) can be surely caused to flow down into the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the holding portion (notch portion 812) has a notch shape that is opened on the upper surface and the side surface of the rotary stage 810, and the holding surface (notch portion) and the same plane formed by the upper surface of the rotary stage 810. The distance from the bottom surface of 812) is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. With this, the holding portion (notch portion 812) can be configured with a simple configuration, and the game ball held by the holding portion (notch portion 812) is exposed from the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810. Therefore, the rolling direction of the game ball can be changed by bringing the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811 of the rotary stage 810 into contact with the game ball held in the notch 812. Further, since the depth of the cutout portion 812 (holding portion) is deeper than the radius of the game ball, the game ball held in the cutout portion 812 (holding portion) collides with the game ball rolling on the rolling surface 811. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of flipping out from the cutout portion 812 (holding portion).

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 and the tray portion 801 are inclined downward toward the game area 32. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) can be surely flown down to the game area 32.

In the third embodiment, the tray 801 is provided with an extending portion 806 extending toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) from the end on the game area 32 side in a plan view, and the guide groove 807 is an extending portion. The first valve (dividing valve 820) is formed so as to communicate with the tip of 806, and the distance to the base portion of the extending portion 806 (the edge of the tray portion 801 on the game area 32 side) is greater than the radius of the game ball. Is also arranged so as to be shorter, higher than the rolling surface 802 of the game ball of the tray portion 801 when it is closed (so as to intersect the same plane formed by the rolling surface 802), and the guide groove when opened. It is arranged so as to be equal to or lower than the height of the bottom surface of 807. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the game balls rolling in the direction directly toward the guide groove 807 in the tray portion 801 enter the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the distance between the tip of the extending portion 806 and the winning area (starting winning opening 36) in the height direction is longer than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game ball flowing down from the tip of the extending portion 806 toward the winning area (starting winning opening 36) collides with the game ball flowing down without passing through the extending portion 806, and the winning is hindered. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the game balls that have flowed down without going through the extension portion 806 will win the winning area (starting winning opening 36). Therefore, it is possible to give a certain amount of variation in the winning frequency to the winning area (starting winning opening 36) of the game ball, that is, the start value S.

In the third embodiment, the first valve (gate valve 820) is arranged so as to intersect the same plane formed by the upper surface of the rotary stage 810 when closed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the game ball rolling from the rotary stage 810 without passing through the holding portion (notch portion 812) directly enters the guide groove 807.

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 reversely rotates at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to avoid ball biting in the rotary stage 810. In addition, it is possible to suggest a specific game state (such as a change in latency) by the operation.

In the third embodiment, the rotary stage 810 is arranged so as to intersect the same plane formed by the tray portion 801, and the step between the rotary stage 810 and the same plane is smaller than the radius of the game ball. As a result, the game ball gets over the step and rides on the rotary stage 810, so that the rolling direction when riding on the rotary stage 810 can be irregularly changed. In addition, it is possible to easily collect the game balls in front of the rotary stage 810 and delay the timing when the game balls flow down to the rotary stage 810.

In the third embodiment, a rolling direction conversion member (obstacle nail 830) capable of converting the rolling direction of the game ball is arranged in a region other than the region where the holding portion of the rotary stage 810 is formed. Thereby, the game ball can be temporarily retained on the rotary stage 810, and the rolling direction of the game ball during rolling of the rotary stage 810 can be irregularly changed.

In the third embodiment, a bounce member 840 (slingshot, flipper) that bounces a game ball rolling on the tray portion 801 toward the rotary stage 810 is arranged on the game area 32 side of the tray portion 801. As a result, the game ball ejected from the rotary stage 810 can be returned to the rotary stage 810 again, the game ball is temporarily retained on the tray portion 801 or the rotary stage 810, and the game ball is held (notched portion). The degree of expectation held in 812) can be increased.

In the third embodiment, the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) takes in the game ball flowing down the game area 32 and can supply it to the rotating stage 810, and the first intake flow path (warp passage 40e) and the first intake flow. The first detection means (third proximity switch 72c) for detecting the game ball flowing down to the road (warp passage 40e), and the first detection passage (warp passage 40e) branched from the middle to communicate with the game area 32 The flow path of the game sphere, which is arranged at a branch position between the first branch flow channel 851 and the first branch flow channel 851 of the first intake flow channel (warp passage 40e) and flows down into the first intake flow channel (warp passage 40e). Is provided with a second valve (first switching valve 853) that can be switched between a flow path that flows down to the rotary stage 810 and a flow path that flows down into the first branch flow path 851. The first switching valve 853) operates based on the number of times the game ball is detected by the first detection means (third proximity switch 72c). Thereby, it is possible to adjust so that the game balls flowing down to the rotary stage 810 do not increase too much.

In the third embodiment, the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860) includes an introduction port 862 into which a game ball is introduced, and directs the game ball introduced into the introduction port 862 toward the guiding means (rotating body unit 800). The second intake passage 864 to be flowed down, the second intake passage 865 branching from the middle of the second intake passage 864 to communicate with the game area 32, and the second intake passage 865 of the second intake passage 864. The flow path of the game ball, which is arranged at the branch position of, and flows down to the second intake flow path 864, flows down to the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) and the flow down to the second branch flow path 865. A path, a third valve (second switching valve 866) that can be switched to, and a second detection means (fourth proximity switch 72d) that detects a game ball that has flowed down into the second intake passage 864, The third valve (second switching valve 866) operates based on the number of times the game ball is detected by the second detection means (fourth proximity switch 72d). This allows the distribution unit (first distribution unit 860) to be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, the distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) is connected to the introduction port 872 into which the game ball is introduced, the two discharge ports 873 from which the game ball is discharged, and the introduction port 872, and from the middle thereof. The third branch flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874) that branches and communicates with the two outlets 873, and is switched at every reception of the game ball arranged at the branch position of the third branch flow path (Y-shaped flow path 874) A plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 including a third switching valve 875 that operates to alternately flow down the game balls toward the two outlets 873 are provided. The distribution mechanism 871 is connected in series in such a manner that one outlet 873 of the distribution mechanism 871 at the front stage communicates with the inlet 872 of the distribution mechanism 871 at the rear stage, and a plurality of distribution mechanisms 871 (distribution mechanism 871A, distribution mechanism 871B, At least one of the outlets 873 at the end of the distribution mechanism 871C and the distribution mechanism 871D is in communication with the guide unit (rotating body unit 800). Thereby, the distribution unit (second distribution unit 870) that mechanically distributes the game balls can be constructed with a simple configuration.

In the third embodiment, by the third detection means (second proximity switch 72b) and the third detection means (second proximity switch 72b) that detect that a specific position different from the winning area in the game area 32 has been passed. Lighting display means (upper effect unit 40c, display device 41) for performing lighting display based on detection of a game ball is provided. As a result, even when the holding portion (notch portion 812) of the guiding means (rotating body unit 800) holds all the game balls, the hitting of the game balls can be reduced.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63. The configurations other than those described below may be the same as those of the first to third embodiments. Further, in the following embodiments, the same reference numerals will be used for the configurations having the same functions as those of the first to third embodiments, and the duplicate description will be appropriately omitted.

[Game control device]
FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control system according to the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 60, unlike FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, in the game control device 100 (main board, main board), the output circuit 134-137 does not exist, the electric circuit is simplified, and the number of wires (the number of signals). ) Is reduced, and a sufficient space (place) for arranging electronic parts and the like can be secured. This is because the communication between the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU 111a) and each of the drivers 138a-138d, 150 and the relay board 70 is performed by serial communication instead of conventional parallel communication as described below. In addition, serial communication is performed between the game microcomputer 111 and the effect control device 300, between the game microcomputer 111 and the payout control device 200, and between the game microcomputer 111 and the inspection device 500, that is, the first embodiment. Is no different.

Data from the serial port 173a (first serial port) of the gaming microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the drivers 138a-138d and the driver 150 by serial communication (serial method) via the serial signal line 174a. Data from the serial port 173b (second serial port) of the gaming microcomputer 111 is transmitted to the relay board 70 by serial communication (serial method) via the serial signal line 174b. In FIG. 3 of the first embodiment, data is transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 by parallel communication (parallel method). In the present embodiment, the serial communication is synchronous serial communication and is performed by, for example, SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface), but is not limited to this.

In the present embodiment, each of the drivers 138c and 138d is a part of one driver IC chip 156 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). The drivers 138b and 150 are each part of one driver IC chip 157 (integrated circuit chip, electronic component). Each driver may be provided as one IC chip.

The game control device 100 (main board) has a connector section 160 (CN1) for connecting with a relay board 70 that supplies a test shooting test signal to the test shooting test apparatus, and the relay board 70 is the game control device 100 (main board). It has a connector part 162 (CN2) for connecting to a board. The connector portion 160 and the connector portion 162 are insertion ports for electric wires such as cables (or harnesses), and are electrically connected to each other by cables or the like. Like the buffer 133, the connector unit 160 (CN1) is also a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop.

[Circuit diagram of game control device]
61A, 61B, and 62 are circuit diagrams illustrating a part of an electric circuit (electronic circuit) provided in the game control device 100 (main board, main board) according to the fourth embodiment. It should be noted that the positions of electronic components (IC chips, etc.), elements, terminals, etc. in the circuit diagram may be irrelevant with the actual positions of these on the substrate. The terminals may be pins, for example. In the present embodiment, the board means a circuit board such as a printed board.

The serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a terminal A1 for serial data signal (TXA), a terminal A2 for serial clock signal (CKA), and a terminal A3 for chip select signal (SA0) (slave select signal) ( See FIG. 61). The wiring connected to the terminal A1 is a data line 194 (194a, 194b) for transmitting a serial data signal (TXA), and the wiring connected to the terminal A2 is a clock line for transmitting a serial clock signal (CKA). 195 (195a, 195b), and the wiring connected to the terminals A3, A4 becomes the chip select line 196 (196a, 196b) for transmitting the chip select signals (SA0, SA1). Since only serial data is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (master) by serial communication, the terminal A1 is a terminal for serial data output and the terminal for serial data input from the slave is omitted. .. The chip select signal is a signal for selecting a slave (IC chip) that enables an input operation or an output operation.

The serial signal line 174a (FIG. 60) from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits at least the data line 194 (signal line) for transmitting the serial data signal (TXA) and the serial clock signal (CKA). Clock line 195 (signal line) for

The serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a terminal B1 for a serial data signal (TXB), a terminal B2 for a serial clock signal (CKB), and a terminal B3 for a chip select signal (SB0) (slave select signal) ( See FIG. 62). The wiring connected to the terminal B1 becomes the data line 211 for transmitting the serial data signal (TXB), the wiring connected to the terminal B2 becomes the clock line 212 for transmitting the serial clock signal (CKB), and the terminal B3. The wiring to be connected to is the chip select line 218 for transmitting the chip select signal (SB0).

Since only serial data is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (master) by serial communication, the terminal B1 is a terminal for serial data output, and the terminal for serial data input from the slave is omitted. .. When the serial port 173b performs serial communication with only one IC chip (slave), the chip select signal and its chip select line 218 can be omitted.

The serial signal line 174b (FIG. 60) from the serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111 transmits at least the data line 211 (signal line) for transmitting the serial data signal (TXB) and the serial clock signal (CKB). And a clock line 212 (signal line) for

[Circuit diagram for serial communication between gaming microcomputer and driver]
FIG. 61A is a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and each driver in the game control device 100, and an electric circuit (electronic circuit) around the game microcomputer 111 and each driver IC chip. It is a circuit diagram which illustrates. FIG. 61A shows the external information signal from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111, the LED drive signal of the collective display device 50, the transmission status of the LED drive signal to the performance display device 152, and the like. The LED drive signal is a signal to the digit line and the segment line of the collective display device 50 or the performance display device 152.

Each of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 is a 16-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit that converts a serial data signal (TXA) from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 into a parallel data signal. The driver IC chips 156 and 157 may be general ones having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The shift register is composed of, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and the bit data of one D-type flip-flop moves to the adjacent D-type flip-flop in synchronization with the serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit includes, for example, a plurality of D-type flip-flops, and latches (holds) and captures (sets) 16-bit data of the shift register at a predetermined latch timing for receiving a latch signal.

The driver IC chips 156 and 157 are cascade-connected (multistage connection), and the driver IC chip 156 constitutes the first stage and the driver IC chip 157 constitutes the second stage. The serial data signal (TXA) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data line 194a is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 156, passes through the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, and is output from the output terminal DOUT. Output is possible. The serial data signal (TXA) output from the output terminal DOUT of the driver IC chip 156 is input to the input terminal DIN of the driver IC chip 157 and passes through the shift register of the driver IC chip 157.

The same serial clock signal (CKA) from the clock line 195a, the same chip select signal (SA0) from the chip select line 196a, and the same reset signal (RESET) from the reset line 197a are parallel to the driver IC chips 156 and 157. Are input to the respective input terminals SCK, input terminals /CS, and input terminals /RESET. In addition, "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. The shift registers of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 operate in synchronization with the same serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuits of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 take in the data of the shift register at the timing (latch timing) at which the same chip select signal (SA0) is received as the latch signal. The data captured by the parallel data latch circuits of the driver IC chips 156 and 157 are simultaneously output as 16-bit parallel data from the parallel output terminals (PA0-PA7, PB0-PB7). Therefore, the two driver IC chips 156 and 157 collectively serve as a 32-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit, and convert the serial data signal (TXA) into 32-bit parallel data. Further, the driver IC chips 156 and 157 are simultaneously reset (initialized) by the reset signal from the Schmitt buffer 125, and the internal data is cleared.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, the terminals PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB2 are respectively connected to the terminals S17-S7 of the connector section 181 (CN3). The terminals S17-S7 of the connector portion 181 (CN3) are connected to the external information terminal 71 by an electric wire such as a cable. Therefore, the signals from the parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB2 of the driver IC chip 156 are transmitted to the external information terminal 71 as external information AK (external information signal). In this way, the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 and PB0-PB2 form the driver 138d (FIG. 60). The terminal PB3 of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156 supplies a door signal indicating the opening of the glass frame 15 or the like.

For example, the external information AK is a calling signal, an out signal, a security signal, a main prize ball signal, a big hit signal, a big hit signal, a big hit signal, a big hit signal, a big hit signal, a start opening signal, a symbol determination number signal, Door/frame opening signal. The calling signal is a signal for calling an attendant in the game hall (hall), and the out signal is a signal based on the detection of the out ball detection switch 74. The security signal is a signal transmitted when there is a fraud or an error such as a magnet fraud or radio wave fraud. The main prize ball signal is a signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10).

The jackpot 1 signal, jackpot 2 signal, jackpot 3 signal, jackpot 4 signal may be signals defined by the model as jackpot information, and are turned on at the start of the jackpot and turned off at the end of the jackpot or at the end of time saving. It is a good signal. The starting mouth signal is a winning signal of the starting mouth based on the detection of the starting mouth 1 switch 36a and the starting mouth 2 switch 37a, and the symbol fixed number signal indicates the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game (number of symbols fixed). The door/frame opening signal is a signal indicating the opening of the glass frame 15 or the front frame (game frame) 12 by the glass frame opening detection switch 63 or the front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch). ..

The security signal, the main prize ball signal, the starting opening signal, the door/frame opening signal, and the symbol determination frequency signal may be set in the external information editing process (A1319) of the timer interrupt process.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 156, the terminals PB4 to PB7 are respectively connected to the terminals L9 to L12 of the connector section 185 (CN4) via the gate driver 183. The connector portion 185 (CN4) is connected to the collective display device 50 by an electric wire such as a cable. The parallel output terminals PB4-PB7 are electrically connected to the digit lines (LED digits 0-3) to which the cathode terminals of the LED lamps (D1-D18) of the collective display device 50 are connected. As described above, the shift register of the driver IC chip 156, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PB4 to PB7 form the driver 138c (FIG. 60).

Since the first special figure variation display portion 51 (lamp D1) and the second special figure variation display portion 52 (lamp D1) of the collective display device 50 are 7-segment type (87 segment type when the dot Dp is inserted) indicators. The collective display device 50 can be controlled by regarding it as an LED display of 4 digits×8 segments. In this case, the digit line (LED digit 0-3) selects a digit.

The gate driver 183 is used for signal amplification and the like, and branches the wiring from the terminals PB4 to PB7 in two directions. The pull-up resistor R1 is connected to the wiring from the terminals PB4 to PB7. The input terminals I3 and I7 of the gate driver 183 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB4 of the driver IC chip 156, the input terminals I2 and I5 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB5 of the driver IC chip 156, and the input terminal I1 and I8 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB6 of the driver IC chip 156, and the input terminals I4 and I6 are connected to the wiring from the terminal PB7 of the driver IC chip 156. The signals at the input terminals I1-I7 are amplified and output from the output terminals O1-O7. The output terminals O5-O7 related to the digit lines are connected to the terminals L9-L12 of the connector section 185 (CN4), while the output terminals O1-O4 related to the digit lines are a 4-digit 7-segment type (including the dot Dp It is connected to the digit line (digit 0-3) of the performance display device 152 which is an LED display of 8 segment type. The cost can be reduced by sharing the terminals PB4-PB7 with the digit line (digit 0-3) of the performance display device 152 and the digit line (LED digit 0-3) of the collective display device 50.

Of the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 157, the terminals PA0-PA7 are connected to the terminals L1-L8 of the connector portion 185 (CN4) via the resistor R2. The connector portion 185 (CN4) is connected to the collective display device 50 by an electric wire such as a cable. The parallel output terminals PA0-PA7 are electrically connected to the segment lines (LED segments 0-7) to which the anode terminals of the LED lamps of the collective display device 50 are connected. As described above, the shift register of the driver IC chip 157, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PA0 to PA7 form the driver 138b (FIG. 60).

A current is supplied to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line (LED segment 0-7) of the collective display device 50, and the current is drawn from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential through the digit line (LED digit 0-3). Then, a current flows through the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method (dynamic lighting method), and the LEDs are turned on.

Further, among the parallel output terminals of the driver IC chip 157, the terminals PB0 to PB7 are each a segment line of the performance display device 152 which is a 4-digit 7-segment type (8-segment type including the dot Dp) LED display. Electrically connect to (ag, Dp). In this way, the shift register of the driver IC chip 157, the parallel data latch circuit, and the parallel output terminals PB0 to PB7 form the driver 150 (FIG. 60).

By supplying a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment lines (ag, Dp) of the performance display device 152 and drawing the current from the cathode terminal that outputs the ground potential through the digit lines (digits 0-3). , A current is applied to the LEDs sequentially selected by the dynamic driving method, and the LEDs are lit. In this way, the performance display device 152 can display the probability setting value, the accessory ratio, the payout rate, and the number of discharged balls as a performance display.

As described above, the external information signal, the LED drive signal of the collective display device 50 (the signal to the digit line and the segment line), the LED drive signal of the performance display device 152 (the signal to the digit line and the segment line) is for gaming. The microcomputer 111 transmits the serial data signal (TXA) combined in output processing (A1306) and the like, and outputs the parallel data signal by the driver IC chips 156 and 157.

FIG. 61B is a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the solenoid driver 138a in the game control device 100, and an electric circuit (electronics) around the game microcomputer 111 and the IC chip for the solenoid driver. 3 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit). The transmission status of the solenoid drive signal from the serial port 173a of the gaming microcomputer 111 is shown.

The IC chips 138a-1 and 138a-2 for the solenoid driver configure a driver (drive circuit) 138a (FIG. 60) that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal as a parallel data signal. The IC chip 138a-1 is a general 8-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The IC chip 138a-2 is a Darlington current amplifier that amplifies the current signal from the IC chip 138a-1 by Darlington connection in which a plurality of transistors are directly connected.

The serial data signal (TXA) transmitted from the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data line 194b is input to the input terminal SI of the IC chip 138a-1, and passes through the shift register of the IC chip 138a-1. A serial clock signal (CKA), a gate signal (GATE) as an enable signal, and a reset signal from the Schmitt buffer 125 are input to the input terminal SCK, the input terminal /G, and the input terminal /SCLR of the IC chip 138a-1, respectively. It is input by the clock line 195b, the enable signal line 198b (198), and the reset line 197b. The data line 194b may be branched from the data line 194a (FIG. 61A), and the clock line 195b may be branched from the clock line 195a (FIG. 61A).

The shift register of the IC chip 138a-1 operates by the serial clock signal (CKA). The parallel data latch circuit of the IC chip 138a-1 takes in the data of the shift register by the chip select signal (SA1) input to the input terminal RCK. The chip select signal (SA1) here functions as a latch signal. The data fetched by the parallel data latch circuit of the IC chip 138a-1 is output from the parallel output terminals (QA-QH) as an 8-bit parallel data signal when the gate signal (GATE) is input. The gate signal (GATE) functions as an enable signal that enables the output of the IC chip 138a-1. When the gate signal (GATE) is input to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer, a parallel data signal is output from the parallel output terminals (QA-QH) via the output circuit capable of output operation. Further, the IC chip 138a-1 is reset by the reset signal and the internal data is cleared.

Among the parallel data signals generated from the serial data signal (TXA) by the IC chip 138a-1, the signal from the parallel output terminal QE is a payout control as a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball by the ball launching device. It is output to the device 200. The signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC are output as a special winning opening solenoid drive signal, a lever solenoid drive signal, and a universal solenoid drive signal, respectively. In other words, the special winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid drive signal, and the universal electric solenoid drive signal are included in the serial data signal (TXA) from the gaming microcomputer 111 and transmitted, and the IC chip 138a-1 transmits the parallel data signal. Is output as. Even if the number of solenoids varies depending on the model of the gaming machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is output from the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU 111a) by serial communication, so the wiring required for parallel communication is required. The number can be reduced, and the game control device 100 (game control means) can be easily shared between different models.

Here, the special winning opening solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the special winning opening solenoid 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39, and the lever solenoid driving signal drives the lever solenoid 86b that opens the specific area 86. The normal electric solenoid drive signal is a signal for driving the normal electric solenoid 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37.

The IC chip 138a-2 amplifies the special winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid drive signal, and the universal solenoid drive signal from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1. The drive signals from the parallel output terminals QA-QC of the IC chip 138a-1 are input to the input terminals J1-J3 of the IC chip 138a-2 via the resistor R4, and output from the output terminals K1-K3 after amplification. To do. The special winning opening solenoid drive signal, the lever solenoid driving signal, and the ordinary electric solenoid driving signal from the output terminals K1-K3 are not only transmitted to the special winning opening solenoid 39b, the lever solenoid 86b, and the ordinary electric solenoid 37c, respectively. It is also transmitted to the relay board 70 (FIG. 60).

[Circuit diagram related to serial communication between gaming microcomputer and relay board]
FIG. 62 illustrates a circuit diagram relating to serial communication between the game microcomputer 111 and the relay board 70 in the game control device 100 (main board), and the game microcomputer 111 and the connector section 160 (CN1). It is a circuit diagram which illustrates an electric circuit (electronic circuit) of the circumference.

As the serial signals output from the terminals B1-B3 of the serial port 173b of the gaming microcomputer 111, the serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), and the chip select signal (SB0) are respectively in the connector section 160 (CN1). ) Serial data signal (TXB) terminal D7 (signal terminal), serial clock signal (CKB) terminal D6 (signal terminal), chip select signal (SB0) terminal D3 (chip select terminal) buffer 133 Is transmitted through. When the serial port 173b performs serial communication with only one IC chip (slave), the chip select signal and the chip select line 218 through which the chip select signal is transmitted may be omitted in some cases.

The serial data signal (TXB) includes a test shot test signal transmitted to the relay board 70 electrically connected to the connector unit 160 (CN1). Unlike the conventional parallel data signal, the test shooting test signal for the gaming machine 10 is transmitted as a serial data signal (TXB) from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the relay board 70. The test shooting test signal is a signal in which information necessary for the test shooting test, such as on/off information of various switches in FIG. 60, is taken in by the gaming microcomputer 111 (CPU 111a) and is collected and transmitted as serial data. Therefore, even if the number of switches is different for each model of the gaming machine 10, the wiring for each switch required in the case of parallel communication can be reduced, and the game control device 100 (game control means) is shared between different models. It becomes easy to make.

The serial data signal (TXB) is converted by the relay board 70 into a parallel data signal, and then output to a test-shooting test apparatus that carries out a test-shooting test. Therefore, it is easy to share the relay board 70 between different models only by preparing the wiring required for serial communication in advance on the relay board 70 (relay means).

As the above-mentioned various switches, there are a gate switch 34a, a starting opening 1 switch 36a, a starting opening 2 switch 37a, a winning opening switch 35a, a special winning opening switch 39a, a specific area switch 72, a remaining ball discharging opening switch 73, and the like. The solenoid drive signal as the test shot test signal is transmitted from the driver 138a to the relay board 70 by another route as described above.

In the timer interrupt processing (interruption processing program, a part of the game control program) of FIG. 6A, information on/off of various switches (on/off signal) is input and captured in the game microcomputer 111 (CPU 111a) (input processing (A1303) , Winning a prize mouth switch/state monitoring processing (A1310)), and then transmitted as a test firing test signal of serial data (output processing (A1306)).

Further, as a test firing test signal transmitted in the output processing (A1306) of the timer interrupt processing (interrupt processing program), the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number (set in A3403 and A3503), special figure 1 and special figure 2 Signal related to fluctuation start (set by A3205 and A3210), signal related to end of fluctuation of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (set with A2609), signal related to start of jackpot of special figure 1 and special figure 2 (set with A2610), right A signal related to a hitting instruction or a left hitting instruction (on/off of the firing position designation signal 1) (set by A2610 or A2614), a signal related to opening and ending of opening of the special winning opening (on/off of a signal during operation of the special electric auditors product 1) ( A2611 and A2613 are set).

Furthermore, as the test-shooting test signal transmitted in the output processing (A1306), signals relating to the start and end of the universal figure variation display game, signals relating to the start of universal electric operation and termination of ordinary electric operation (normal electric accessory 1 operating signal On/off), a signal related to the start and end of the high probability state (special symbol 1 ON/OFF of the high probability state signal, special symbol 2 ON/OFF of the high probability state signal), a signal related to the start and end of time saving (special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal ON/OFF, ON/OFF of the special symbol 2 variable time shortened state signal, ON/OFF of the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal, ON/OFF of the normal symbol 1 variable time shortened state signal, etc., and a gaming machine error state signal.

The test shooting test signal for the gaming machine 10 is transmitted to the relay board 70 as a serial data signal (TXB) via the connector unit 160 (CN1).

Further, the gaming microcomputer 111 has a terminal OE connected to an enable line 214 (enable wiring) that enables the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 (predetermined circuit) provided on the relay board 70. The enable signal (OE) output from the terminal OE of the gaming microcomputer 111 is transmitted via the buffer 133 to the enable signal terminal D2 (enable terminal) of the connector section 160 (CN1). The wiring to which the enable signal is transmitted is referred to as an enable line 214. The pull-up resistor R is connected to the enable line 214 before connecting to the buffer 133.

Further, the reset signal (RESET) from the Schmitt buffer 125 is transmitted via the buffer 133 to the reset signal terminal D10 (reset terminal) of the connector section 160 (CN1). The wiring through which the reset signal is transmitted is referred to as a reset line 216 (reset wiring).

In addition, the connector section 160 (CN1) has grounding ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, D9 for grounding and power supply terminals D11, D12 to which a voltage of 5V is supplied.

The buffer 133 is a three-state buffer, and when the input to the /1G terminal is L level (GND), the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals 1A1-1A4 is output terminals 1Y1-1Y4 as it is. And the input to the /1G terminal is at the H level, a high impedance state is established between the input terminals 1A1-1A4 and the output terminals 1Y1-1Y4, and they are electrically disconnected. When the input to the /2G terminal is at the L level (GND), the buffer 133 outputs the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals 2A1-2A4 as it is from the output terminals 2Y1-2Y4 to the /2G. When the input to the terminals is at H level, the input terminals 2A1-2A4 and the output terminals 2Y1-2Y4 are in a high impedance state and are electrically disconnected. In addition, "/" indicates a negative logic terminal.

The buffer 133 corrects and outputs a logical value voltage (L level or H level) and is provided as an option. When the wiring between the gaming microcomputer 111 and the connector section 160 (CN1) is short, the buffer 133 is a buffer. 133 becomes unnecessary.

In FIG. 62, since the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are L level (GND), the signals input to the input terminals 1A1-1A4, 2A1-2A4 are output terminals 1Y1-1Y4, 2Y1-2Y4, respectively. Output from. Therefore, the reset signal (RESET), the serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), the chip select signal (SB0), and the enable signal (OE) are input terminals 1A1, 1A3, 1A2, 1A4 of the buffer 133, respectively. , 2A1 and output from the output terminals 1Y1, 1Y3, 1Y2, 1Y4, 2Y1 toward the connector section 160 (CN1). Output terminal 1Y1 for reset signal (RESET), output terminal 1Y3 for serial data signal (TXB), output terminal 1Y2 for serial clock signal (CKB), output terminal 1Y4 for chip select signal (SB0), enable signal ( The output terminal 2Y1 for OE) is connected to the terminal D10, the terminal D7, the terminal D6, the terminal D3, and the terminal D2 of the connector unit 160 (CN1) by wiring.

[Wiring example 1]
FIG. 63 is a wiring example (wiring example 1) between the connector section 160 (CN1) and the buffer 133 or the gaming microcomputer 111 on the board (that is, the main board and the main board) of the game control device 100. It is a figure demonstrated based on the position (physical arrangement|positioning) where wiring is actually arrange|positioned.

In this embodiment, the board (main board) of the game control device 100 is a general double-sided printed board (double-sided board). In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the substrate. The circuit components may be arranged on both sides or the bottom surface of the substrate. In the printed circuit board (double-sided circuit board) as a main circuit board, wirings such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which these are connected are the upper surface (front side, upper layer). The lower surface (back side, lower layer) is arranged on the upper surface (the lower surface may be used). The board (main board) of the game control device 100 may be a general multilayer printed board (multilayer board). In this case, in the printed circuit board as the main board, the wiring such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which these are connected are the outer layers (top layer, surface layer). ), the two inner layers (inner layer) serve as a power layer and a ground layer (ground layer, GND layer).

The terminal to which the terminal of the connector unit 160 (CN1) is connected by wiring is the terminal of the buffer 133 when the buffer 133 is provided, but is the terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 when the buffer 133 is not provided. is there.

When the buffer 133 is provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, the reset line 216 from the terminal D10, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 are , The output terminal 1Y3 for the serial data signal (TXB), the output terminal 1Y2 for the serial clock signal (CKB), the output terminal 2Y1 for the enable signal (OE), and the output terminal for the reset signal (RESET) of the buffer 133, respectively. 1Y1 and output terminal 1Y4 for chip select signal (SB0).

When the buffer 133 is not provided, the data line 211 from the terminal D7, the clock line 212 from the terminal D6, the enable line 214 from the terminal D2, and the chip select line 218 from the terminal D3 are each the game microcomputer 111. Of the serial data signal (TXB), the terminal B2 for the serial clock signal (CKB), the terminal OE for the enable signal (OE), and the terminal B3 for the chip select signal (SB0). The reset line 216 from the terminal D10 is connected to the terminal RESET for the reset signal (RESET) in a place other than the gaming microcomputer 111, but the position of the terminal RESET may be different from that in FIG.

As described above, the connector unit 160 (CN1) has the enable line 214 connected to the plurality of signal terminals D6 and D7 to which the clock line 212 (signal line) and the data line 211 (signal line) are respectively connected. The terminal D2 and the reset terminal D10 to which the reset line 216 is connected are provided.

Further, the connector unit 160 (CN1) includes ground terminals D4 and D5 arranged closer to the signal terminals D6 and D7 than the enable terminal D2. Since the distance between the enable terminal D2 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be increased by the ground terminals D4 and D5, and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D4 and D5, the enable terminal D2 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded. It is possible to prevent or suppress interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between and.

The ground terminal D4 is closer to the signal terminal D6 (clock terminal) than the chip select terminal D3. The ground terminal D5 is closer to both the signal terminals D6 and D7 than the chip select terminal D3. Since the distance between the chip select terminal D3 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be widened by the ground terminals D4 and D5, and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D4 and D5, the chip select terminal D3 and the signal terminal D6. , D7, interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) can be prevented or suppressed.

Further, the connector unit 160 (CN1) includes a ground terminal D8 arranged closer to the signal terminals D6 and D7 than the reset terminal D10. The connector section 160 (CN1) includes a ground terminal D9 arranged closer to the signal terminal D7 (data terminal) than the reset terminal D10. Since the distance between the reset terminal D10 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be widened by the ground terminals D8 and D9, and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded by the ground terminals D8 and D9, the reset terminal D10 and the signal terminals D6 and D7 can be shielded. It is possible to prevent or suppress interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between and.

In the present embodiment, in the printed circuit board (double-sided board), the ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, D9 of the connector portion 160 (CN1) on the upper surface are the ground wires (the rear side, the lower layer) existing on the lower surface (see the figure). (Not shown) is connected to a ground by through holes or through vias. The power supply terminals D11 and D12 on the upper surface are connected to power supply lines (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes or through vias. The ground wire (not shown) connected to these ground terminals and the power wire (not shown) connected to the power supply terminal may be present on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). When the main board is a multi-layer board, the ground terminals D1, D4, D5, D8, and D9 of the connector unit 160 (CN1) are the ground layers (ground layer, GND layer) inside the main board (printed board). ) Is connected by through holes or through vias. The power supply terminals D11 and D12 are connected to the power supply layer inside the main board (printed board) by through holes or through vias.

In the present embodiment, in the board (main board) of the game control device 100, in order to reduce interference (crosstalk, crosstalk, influence) with other wiring, the communication frequency is high and the pulse signal is frequent (high-speed serial signal). The data line 211 and the clock line 212 for transmitting data are collectively arranged, and no other wiring exists between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines). The other wirings here are the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, etc. to which the pulse signal is not frequently transmitted. Note that the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, that is, the minimum distance between the plurality of signal lines can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212. The intervals (the minimum intervals that can prevent interference in order to make the wiring dense) are set.

In the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the distance W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (here, the clock line 212) near the enable line 214 is the minimum between the data line 211 and the clock line 212. It is wider than the interval W1 (MIN). Further, the distance W3 between the reset line 216 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) near the reset line 216 is wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN). Furthermore, the distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) near the chip select line 218 is wider than the minimum distance W1 (MIN).

Since the interval W2 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W2>W1 (MIN)), interference between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) can be prevented. Since the interval W3 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W3>W1 (MIN)), interference between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. Since the interval W4 is larger than the interval W1 (MIN) at which interference can be prevented (W4>W1 (MIN)), interference between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) can be prevented. In particular, since the test shot test signal is transmitted from the connector section 160 (CN1) to the relay board 70 via an electric wire such as a cable, if the interference is not prevented, the test shot test may be adversely affected.

The data line 211 (signal line) and the clock line 212 (signal line) pass between the opposing terminals of the connector section 160 (CN1), but the terminal where the connector section 160 (CN1) passes in the vicinity. If the interval between the signal line and the signal line is also made larger than the interval W1 (MIN), the interference (crosstalk) between the terminal and the signal line can be prevented or reduced.

In the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the data line 211, the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines), the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 are provided in the predetermined area 201. They are arranged in parallel in one direction (lateral direction). Note that the predetermined region 201 is bent from a state where the wirings (data line 211, clock line 212, enable line 214, reset line 216, chip select line 218) are arranged in one direction (horizontal direction) and is bent toward the terminal. The area between points and terminals is not included. In the predetermined area 201, the interval W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (clock line 212) is wider than the interval W1 between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (W2>W1). The distance W3 between the reset line 216 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the distance W1 (W3>W1). Further, the distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (data line 211) is wider than the distance W1 (W4>W1). In this way, by adjusting the distance between the wirings, it is possible to make the interference (crosstalk) less likely to occur in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel and where interference (crosstalk) is likely to occur. In the present embodiment, in the predetermined area 201, the distance W1 between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 matches the minimum distance W1 (MIN).

[Wiring example 2]
64 is a wiring example (wiring example 2) between the connector section 160 (CN1) and the buffer 133 or the gaming microcomputer 111 on the board (main board) of the game control device 100, the wiring is actually arranged. It is a figure demonstrated based on the position (physical arrangement|positioning). In the wiring example 2, the signal passing through each terminal is changed from the wiring example 1 in FIG. 63, and the pattern of the connector wiring to the connector unit 160 (CN1) is also changed.

In addition, in FIG. 64, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 in FIG. 63. Therefore, the relationship of W2>W1(MIN), W3>W1(MIN), W4>W1(MIN) is established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, the relationship of W2>W1, W3>W1, and W4>W1 is established.

Specifically, in FIG. 64, the terminals for the serial data signal (TXB), the terminals for the serial clock signal (CKB), and the terminals for the enable signal (OE) are replaced with each other from the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63. There is. In the connector section 160 (CN1), the terminal D2 is a clock terminal for a serial clock signal (CKB), the terminal D6 is a data terminal for a serial data signal (TXB), and the terminal D7 is an enable terminal for an enable signal. The layout of the terminals of the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 is also interchanged from the wiring example 1 of FIG.

By such terminal replacement, in the wiring example 2 of FIG. 64, in the connector wiring to the connector unit 160 (CN1), the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines) are collectively arranged on the outer side (right side). The enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 are also collectively arranged on the outside (left side) of the other. Therefore, in the wiring example 2 of FIG. 64, even if the left and right maximum widths of the connector wirings are the same as those of the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63, the spacing W2 between the enable line 214 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) and the reset line are set. The distance W3 between the signal line 216 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) and the distance W4 between the chip select line 218 and the signal line (here, the data line 211) can be made wider than in the wiring example 2 of FIG. The effect of preventing interference by the signal line (the data line 211 or the clock line 212) with other wirings such as the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 where the pulse signal is not transmitted is enhanced.

[Wiring example 3]
FIG. 65 is a wiring example (wiring example 3) between the connector section 160 (CN1) and the buffer 133 or the gaming microcomputer 111 on the board (main board) of the game control device 100, where the wiring is actually arranged. It is a figure demonstrated based on the position (physical arrangement|positioning).

In the present modification of FIG. 65, in the connector section 160 (CN1), the reset terminal and the chip select terminal are replaced from the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63, the terminal D3 becomes the reset terminal, and the terminal D10 becomes the chip select terminal. It has become.

In the wiring example 3 of FIG. 65, unlike the wiring example 1 of FIG. 63, the ground line 222a and the ground line 222b are sandwiched from both sides of the data line 211 and the clock line 212 (a plurality of signal lines) that are arranged collectively. It is arranged. By electrically shielding (shielding) the plurality of signal lines from both sides with the ground line 222a and the ground line 222b, other wiring (enable line 214, reset line 216, chip select line 218, etc.) by the plurality of signal lines is provided. Interference (crosstalk) can be reduced. In order to reduce (prevent) interference (crosstalk) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212, a ground line connected to the ground terminal D9 may be arranged between the data line 211 and the clock line 212. ..

Further, in the wiring example 3 of FIG. 65, the ground line 222c is arranged outside the enable line 214 (on the side opposite to the clock line 212) and on the outside of the reset line 216 (on the side opposite to the data line 211). Are arranged. The enable line 214 is sandwiched between the ground line 222a and the ground line 222c from both sides and electrically shielded, so that other wiring to the enable line 214 (clock line 212, data line 211, wiring not connected to the connector unit 160) Interference) can be reduced. Further, the reset line 216 is sandwiched between the ground line 222b and the ground line 222d from both sides and electrically shielded, so that other wirings to the reset line 216 (such as the clock line 212, the data line 211, and the connector section 160 are connected). Interference (including wiring not included) can be reduced.

The ground lines 222a-222d may be collectively referred to as ground lines. The data line 211, the clock line 212, and the enable line 214 are wirings used to output a test shooting test signal for the gaming machine, but may be generically called signal wirings. On the main board, each signal wiring (data line 211, clock line 212, and enable line 214) is sandwiched between a plurality of ground wirings and arranged between them, and is shielded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) occurs between the signal wiring for outputting the test signal and another wiring, which adversely affects the test of the gaming machine.

Specifically, the ground line 222a is arranged between the one signal line (clock line 212) and the enable line 214, and the other signal line (data line 211) and the reset line 216 (and thus the chip select line 218). The ground line 222b is arranged between the two. A ground line 222c is arranged outside the enable line 214, and a ground line 222d is arranged between the reset line 216 and the chip select line 218. The ground wire 222a is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D4. The ground wire 222b is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D1. The ground wire 222c is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D8. The ground wire 222d is grounded by connecting to the ground terminal D5. The ground line 222a, the ground line 222b, the ground line 222c, and the ground line 222d are connected to the grounded terminal (2A2, 2A3, etc.) of the buffer 133 or the grounded terminal (not shown) of the gaming microcomputer 111. By doing so, the effect of the shield is further enhanced.

Note that, in FIG. 65, the relationship of the intervals between the wirings is maintained from the wiring example 1 in FIG. 63. Therefore, the relationship of W2>W1(MIN), W3>W1(MIN), W4>W1(MIN) is established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, the relationship of W2>W1, W3>W1, and W4>W1 is established.

[Modification of wiring]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining a wiring example (modification example) in the case where the chip select line 218 is omitted, based on the position (physical layout) at which the wiring is actually arranged.

In this modification, in the connector section 160 (CN1), there is no chip select terminal, the terminal D3 is an enable terminal, and the terminal D2 is a ground terminal (FIG. 66(b)). Further, the positions of the terminals of the buffer 133 or the game microcomputer 111 are also changed from FIG. 63 (FIG. 66(a)).

In this modification also, the relationship of W2>W1 (MIN) and W3>W1 (MIN) is established. Further, in the predetermined area 201 where the wirings are arranged in parallel, the relationship of W2>W1 and W3>W1 is established. Therefore, also in this modification, the interference (crosstalk) by the data line 211 and the clock line 212 with other wirings (enable line 214 and reset line 216) can be reduced.

〔Relay board〕
FIG. 67 is a circuit diagram illustrating a circuit diagram relating to the relay board 70 and also an electrical circuit (electronic circuit) around the connector unit 162 (CN2) and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

In the present embodiment, the relay board 70 is also a double-sided printed board (double-sided board) like the board (main board) of the game control device 100. In this embodiment, circuit components (electronic components such as ICs and connectors) are arranged on the upper surface of the relay board 70. The circuit components may be arranged on both surfaces or the bottom surface of the relay board 70. In the relay board 70, wirings such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218, and the terminals connected to them are provided on the upper surface (front side, upper layer) and the lower surface (back side, lower layer). It is placed on the top surface (or the bottom surface). The relay board 70 may be a general multilayer printed board (multilayer board). In this case, in the relay substrate 70, the wirings such as the data line 211, the clock line 212, the enable line 214, the reset line 216, the chip select line 218, and the terminals to which these are connected are arranged in the outer layer (top layer, surface layer). Then, the inner two layers (inner layer) become a power layer and a ground layer (ground layer, GND layer).

The connector portion 162 (CN2) of the relay board 70 is connected to the connector portion 160 (CN1) of the game control device 100 (main board) by an electric wire such as a cable. The terminals F1-F12 of the connector portion 162 (CN2) respectively correspond to the terminals D1-D12 of the connector portion 160 (CN1) and are electrically connected thereto. The connector portion 162 (CN2) has ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, F9 for grounding and power supply terminals F11, F12 to which a voltage of 5V is supplied.

In the present embodiment, in the relay board 70 (double-sided board), the ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, F9 on the upper surface are provided with through holes or through holes in the ground wire (not shown) existing on the lower surface (back side, lower layer). Connected by vias and grounded. The power supply terminals F11 and F12 on the upper surface are connected to power supply lines (not shown) on the lower surface (back side, lower layer) by through holes or through vias. The ground wire (not shown) connected to these ground terminals and the power wire (not shown) connected to the power supply terminal may be present on the upper surface (front side, upper layer). When the relay board 70 is a multi-layer board, the ground terminals F1, F4, F5, F8, F9 are connected to the internal ground layer (ground layer, GND layer) by through holes or through vias. The power supply terminals F11 and F12 are connected to the internal power supply layer by through holes or through vias.

The serial data signal (TXB), the serial clock signal (CKB), the chip select signal (SB0), the enable signal (OE), and the reset signal (RESET) from the connector unit 160 (CN1) are respectively in the connector unit 162 (CN2). From the terminals F7, F6, F3, F2, F10 to the data line 211, the clock line 212, the chip select line 218, the enable line 214, and the reset line 216.

The serial data signal (TXB), serial clock signal (CKB), chip select signal (SB0), enable signal (OE), and reset signal (RESET) are input to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192 via the buffer 191. The serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 converts the test shot test signal (serial data) included in the serial data signal (TXB) into a parallel data signal and outputs the test shot test signal as parallel data.

The buffer 191 is a three-state buffer like the buffer 133, and corrects and outputs a logical value voltage (L level or H level). The buffer 191 outputs the logical value (L or H) of the input to the input terminals NA1 to NA8 directly from the output terminals NY1 to NY8 when the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are both at the L level (GND). When either the output or the input to the /1G terminal or the /2G terminal is at the H level, the input terminals NA1 to NA8 and the output terminals NY1 to NY8 are in a high impedance state and electrically disconnected. In addition, "/" indicates a negative logic terminal. In FIG. 67, the inputs to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal are both at the L level (GND), and the signals from the input terminals NA1 to NA8 are output from the output terminals NY1 to NY8, respectively.

The reset line 216 and the data line 211 from the connector portion 162 (CN2) are connected to the input terminals NA1 and NA2 of the buffer 191. The reset signal (RESET) of the reset line 216 and the serial data signal (TXB) of the data line 211 are input to the input terminals NA1 and NA2 of the buffer 191, respectively, and directed from the output terminals NY1 and NY2 to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192. Output.

On the other hand, the clock line 212 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191. The serial clock signal (CKB) on the clock line 212 is input to the input terminals NA3 and NA4 of the buffer 191, and is output from the output terminals NY3 and NY4 as serial clock signals CKB1 and CKB2 toward the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

The chip select line 218 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA5 and NA6 of the buffer 191. The chip select signal (SB0) on the chip select line 218 is input to the input terminals NA5 and NA6 of the buffer 191, and output from the output terminals NY5 and NY6 as the chip select signals SB01 and SB02 to the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192. ..

The enable line 214 is bifurcated and connected to the input terminals NA7 and NA8 of the buffer 191. The enable signal (OE) of the enable line 214 is input to the input terminals NA7 and NA8 of the buffer 191, and output from the output terminals NY7 and NY8 as enable signals OE1 and OE2 toward the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192.

Before connecting to the buffer 191, a pull-up resistor R is connected to the data line 211, clock line 212, enable line 214, reset line 216, and chip select line 218.

It should be noted that the relationship between the distances between the wirings in FIGS. 63 to 66 is that the distance W1 or the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the data line 211 and the clock line 212 on the relay substrate 70, the enable line 214 and the enable line 214. Between the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) on the side closer to the reset line 216, the distance W3 between the signal line on the side closer to the reset line 216 (data line 211 or the clock line 212), chip select It is also applicable to the distance W4 between the line 218 and the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) on the side closer to the chip select line 218. For example, the relationship of W2>W1(MIN), W3>W1(MIN), W4>W1(MIN) is established between the connector unit 162 (CN2) and the buffer 191, and further, the wirings are arranged in parallel. In the predetermined area 201, the relationship of W2>W1, W3>W1, and W4>W1 is established. Therefore, even on the relay board 70, interference of the signal line (data line 211 or clock line 212) with other wirings such as the enable line 214, the reset line 216, and the chip select line 218 to which the pulse signal is not frequently transmitted is caused. The effect of prevention is strengthened.

The serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 includes 10 8-bit serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192j connected in cascade, and converts a maximum 8×10-bit serial data signal (TXB) into a parallel data signal, and a test firing test signal. Can be output as. The serial data signal (TXB) sequentially passes through the serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192j.

The five serial 8-bit serial/parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192e (first group) and the five serial 8-bit serial/parallel conversion IC chips 192f-192j (second group) respectively have branched serial clock signals CKB1 and CKB2. , Chip select signals SB01 and SB02, and enable signals OE1 and OE2 are simultaneously input in parallel. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192e of the first group and the serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192f-192j of the second group operate in synchronization, and at the same time, the parallel data signals (test firing test) are generated by the enable signals OE1 and OE2. Signal) is output. Further, a reset signal (RESET) can be simultaneously input in parallel to each of the serial-parallel conversion IC chips 192a-192j. That is, each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is simultaneously reset (initialized) by the reset signal to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192, and the internal data is cleared.

Each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is a general 8-bit serial-parallel conversion circuit having a shift register and a parallel data latch circuit (data register). The chip select signals SB01 and SB02 (SB0) function as a latch signal. The parallel data latch circuit takes in the data in the shift register in response to the chip select signals SB01 and SB02. The data taken into the parallel data latch circuit of each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j is output as an 8-bit parallel data signal when the enable signal OE (OE1 or OE2) is input. When the enable signal OE is input to an output circuit such as a three-state buffer, a parallel data signal is output via the output circuit that is enabled for output operation.

When the chip select line 218 is not provided as in FIG. 66, the output circuit may be omitted and the enable signal OE (OE1 or OE2) may be used as the latch signal. The parallel data latch circuit of each serial-parallel conversion IC chip 192a-192j takes in the data of the shift register at the timing when the enable signal OE is input as a latch signal, and outputs it as it is as an 8-bit parallel data signal.

Further, when the latch clock is used as the latch signal of the chip select signals SB01 and SB02 (SB0), the pulse signal is frequently transmitted to the chip select line 218 as well, and therefore, like the data line 211 and the clock line 212. The chip select line 218 may also be included in the plurality of signal lines, and the data line 211, the clock line 212, and the chip select line 218 may be collectively arranged, and the relationship of W4>W1 (MIN) may not be established.

In the present embodiment, the predetermined circuit that enables the enable line 214 to operate is the serial-parallel conversion circuit 192 provided on the relay board 70, and the operation of the predetermined circuit is the output operation, but the operation is not limited to this. is not. For example, the output line or the input line of the buffer 191 can be controlled by connecting the enable line 214 or the separately provided enable line to the /1G terminal and the /2G terminal of the buffer 191.

[Operation/Effect of Fourth Embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game (variable display game) is a special result. The gaming machine 10 has a plurality of signal lines (for example, a data line 211 and a clock line 212) for communicating with a predetermined circuit (for example, a serial/parallel conversion circuit 192) and an enable line 214 (or for enabling the operation of the predetermined circuit). A reset line 216 for resetting a predetermined circuit is provided on the substrate (for example, the main substrate 100 and the relay substrate 70). On the substrate, the distance W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line near the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) is the minimum distance W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines. Wider than).

Since the minimum interval W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines is usually an interval that can prevent interference (crosstalk) between the plurality of signal lines, in the fourth embodiment, the enable line 214 ( Alternatively, the interval W2 (or W3) between the reset line 216) and the signal line on the side closer to the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) is made wider than the minimum interval W1 (MIN) between the plurality of signal lines. Interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line can be prevented or suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the plurality of signal lines include a clock line 212 and a data line 211 for performing serial communication. The data line 211 transmits a test signal regarding the gaming machine 10 (for example, a test shooting test signal). Therefore, interference from the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) to the test signal, which is an important signal, can be prevented or suppressed, and an adverse effect on the test of the gaming machine 10 can be prevented.

In the fourth embodiment, a plurality of signal lines (for example, the data line 211 and the clock line 212) are collectively arranged on the substrate (for example, the main substrate 100 and the relay substrate 70), and the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line are arranged. A ground wire is placed between the wire and the wire. Therefore, by shielding the plurality of signal lines with the ground line, it is possible to prevent or suppress interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line.

In the fourth embodiment, the substrate (for example, the main substrate 100 or the relay substrate 70) includes the predetermined area 201 in which the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel. In the predetermined area 201, the distance W2 (or W3) between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line on the side closer to the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) is smaller than the distance between the plurality of signal lines. wide. Therefore, in the predetermined area 201 where the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the plurality of signal lines are arranged in parallel with each other and interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) is likely to occur, interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) is less likely to occur. it can.

In the fourth embodiment, the board (for example, the main board 100) includes a connector unit 160 for connecting to another board (for example, the relay board 70) on which a predetermined circuit is installed. The connector unit 160 includes a plurality of signal terminals to which a plurality of signal lines are respectively connected, an enable terminal (or a reset terminal) to which the enable line 214 (or a reset line 216) is connected, and an enable terminal (or a reset terminal). And a ground terminal (GND) close to the signal terminal. Therefore, the ground terminal (GND) can widen the distance between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal, and prevent interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable terminal (or reset terminal) and the signal terminal. Or it can be suppressed. In addition, it also leads to widening the distance between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line, so that interference between the enable line 214 (or the reset line 216) and the signal line can be suppressed.

In the fourth embodiment, the game machine 10 includes a game control means (for example, the game control device 100) capable of executing a game (variable display game), and is advantageous to the player when the stop result of the game is a special result. It is possible to generate a special game state. The game control means (for example, the game control device 100) performs required arithmetic processing by the game control program storage means (for example, the ROM 111b) that stores a game control program (for example, an interrupt processing program related to timer interrupt processing) and the game control program. Arithmetic processing means (for example, CPU 111a). The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) can output a test signal (for example, a test shooting test signal) related to the gaming machine 10 by serial communication by the game control program (output processing (A1306)).

Therefore, in the game control means (for example, the game control device 100), the number of wires (the number of signals) and the number of terminals (the number of pins) of the connector are reduced, and a sufficient space (place) for arranging electronic parts and the like can be secured, and the cost can be reduced. It also leads to reductions. In the case of parallel communication, it is necessary to provide wiring and terminals according to the type of data to be transmitted, so the number of wirings (the number of signals) and the number of terminals (pins) of the connector increase.

In the fourth embodiment, the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) takes in signals from the switches (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the special winning opening switch 39a), and then performs serial communication as a test signal. Can be output with. Therefore, even if the number of switches is different for each model of the gaming machine 10, the signal from the switch is taken in by the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) and output as a test signal by serial communication, which is necessary in the case of parallel communication. It is possible to reduce the wiring, and it becomes easy to share game control means (for example, the game control device 100) between different models.

In the fourth embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a relay unit (for example, a relay board 70) that converts a test signal as a serial data signal into a parallel data signal and then outputs the parallel data signal to a test device that performs a test. Therefore, it is easy to share the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) between different models only by preparing the wiring required for the serial communication in advance in the relay means (for example, the relay board 70).

In the fourth embodiment, a serial data signal from an arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) is converted into a parallel data signal, and a light emitting unit (for example, the LED of the collective display device 50) or a solenoid (for example, a special winning opening solenoid 39b, a universal battery). Driving means (for example, driver IC chips 156, 157, drivers 138a-138d, 150) capable of outputting as a driving signal to the solenoid 37c) are provided. The arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) outputs the serial data signal to the driving means from the first serial port (for example, the serial port 173a), and outputs the serial data signal to the relay means (for example, the relay board 70) to the second serial port (for example). For example, it is output from the serial port 173b).

Therefore, even if the number of solenoids varies depending on the model of the gaming machine 10, the drive signal for the solenoids is output from the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) by serial communication, so the wiring required for parallel communication is reduced. This makes it easy to share game control means (for example, the game control device 100) between different models. Further, since the arithmetic processing means (for example, the CPU 111a) outputs the serial data signal to the driving means and the serial data signal to the relay means from different serial ports, the arithmetic processing means includes data for both the driving means and the relay means. It is not necessary to generate a serial data signal, and the output processing to the driving means and the relay means is simplified.

In addition, as described above, the arithmetic processing unit (for example, the CPU 111a) transmits the serial data signal to the relay unit (for example, the relay board 70) to the second serial port (for example, the serial port 173a) different from the first serial port (for example, the serial port 173a). 173b). Therefore, even if components related to the test shot test (for example, the buffer 133 and the connector unit 160 as described above) are not mounted at the time of mass production (other than during inspection), they are not mounted on the first serial port (for example, the serial port 173a). It does not affect the control of the external information terminal 71, the collective display device 50, the solenoids 39b, 37c, 86b, the performance display device 152, etc. which are connected via the drive means (for example, the drivers 138a-138d, 150).

In the fourth embodiment, when the game stop result is a special result, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player outputs a test signal (for example, a test shooting test signal) related to the gaming machine 10. A substrate (for example, the main substrate 100, the relay substrate 70) having signal wirings (for example, the data line 211, the clock line 212, and the enable line 214) for controlling is provided. On the substrate, the signal wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched by a plurality of ground wirings (for example, ground wires 222a-222d). Therefore, the signal wiring is shielded, and it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation where the test of the gaming machine is adversely affected by noise or interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) on the signal wiring.

In the fourth embodiment, when the game stop result is a special result, the gaming machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player can operate a predetermined circuit (for example, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192). A substrate (for example, the main substrate 100, the relay substrate 70) having an enable wiring (for example, the enable line 214) capable of transmitting an enable signal for On the substrate, the enable wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched by a plurality of ground wirings (for example, ground wires 222a-222d). Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which the predetermined circuit malfunctions due to interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the enable wiring and another wiring.

In the fourth embodiment, when the game stop result is a special result, the game machine 10 capable of generating a special game state advantageous to the player is a reset signal for resetting a predetermined circuit (for example, the serial/parallel conversion circuit 192). A substrate (for example, the main substrate 100, the relay substrate 70) having a reset wiring (for example, the reset line 216) capable of transmitting On the substrate, the reset wiring is arranged so as to be sandwiched by a plurality of ground wirings. Therefore, it is possible to suppress or prevent a situation in which a predetermined circuit malfunctions due to interference (crosstalk, crosstalk) between the reset wiring and another wiring.

The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea thereof, and it is clear that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. Further, for example, the present invention can be applied to other types of gaming machines (slot machines, etc.). The scope of the present invention is defined by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of equivalents of the claims.

10 Gaming Machine 25 Production Button 30 Gaming Board 32 Gaming Area 36 First Start Winning Port (First Start Winning Area)
37 Ordinary variation prize winning device (second starting prize area)
39 special variation winning device 40 center case 41 display device 50 collective display device (LED)
70 Relay Board 71 External Information Terminal 72a First Proximity Switch 72b Second Proximity Switch 72c Third Proximity Switch 72d Fourth Proximity Switch 100 Game Control Device (Main Board)
152 Performance display device 160, 162 Connector part 173a, 173b Serial port 174a, 174b Serial signal line 191 Buffer 192 Serial parallel conversion circuit 200 Discharge control device 201 Predetermined area 211 Data line 212 Clock line 214 Enable line 216 Reset line 300 Performance control device (Sub board)
800 rotating body unit 801 tray part,
802 rolling surface 805 accommodating portion 806 extending portion 807 guiding groove 810 rotating stage 811 rolling surface 812 notch portion (holding portion)
820 Gate valve 830 Obstacle nail 840 Bounce member 850 Distribution device 851 First branch flow path 853 First switching valve 860 First distribution unit 864 Second intake flow path 865 Second branch flow path 866 Second switching valve 870 Second distribution unit 871 (871A-871D) Sorting mechanism 872 (872A-872D) Inlet port 873 (873A-873D) Outlet port 875 Third switching valve 876 Rotating member 883 Stopper member 890 Second rotating stage 891 Second notch (second) 2 holding part)

Claims (3)

A game control means capable of executing the variable display game and an effect control means capable of executing an effect associated with the variable display game are provided, and when the stop result of the variable display game is a special result, the player is informed. In a gaming machine that can generate an advantageous special gaming state,
The effect control means,
In the variable display game once, it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous effect in which a pseudo variable effect indicating a degree of expectation that the stop result of the variable display game becomes the special result is performed a predetermined number of times.
At least two of the pseudo-variable effects that are performed a predetermined number of times, the same effect as the pseudo-variable effect that is executed first after changing the mode that suggests the degree of expectation of the special result. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is also executed in a pseudo variable effect that is executed later. The effect control means,
In the pseudo variation effect that is performed at least twice in succession among the pseudo variation effects that are performed the predetermined number of times, the pseudo variation effect that is executed first after differentiating the mode that indicates the degree of expectation of the special result The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the same effect is also executed in a pseudo variable effect that is executed immediately after. The effect control means,
At least the first and second pseudo-variable effects that are performed the predetermined number of times are the same as the pseudo-variable effect that is executed the first time after changing the mode in which the degree of expectation of the special result is suggested. The game machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the effect of the content is also executed in the pseudo-variable effect executed for the second time.